JP6687009B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  Conventionally, an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is provided by providing a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball entering the actuation opening (starting entry means). A game machine to execute is known (for example, refer to Patent Document 1). For example, when the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, it shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

JP, 2005-074175, A

  However, since the gaming machine starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the action of the player is interposed after shifting the game state to the specific control state, There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention enables the launching means for launching the game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and the game ball flowing down through the game area, and the internal lottery is performed when the game ball is entered. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means and the starting ball entering means, the game state transition to transition the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player A game machine having means, having an open state in which a game ball flowing down a game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down a game area does not enter, and a game ball entering itself. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the opening and closing ball entering means to move from the open state to the closed state based on the ball and the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the game ball flowing down the game area It is equipped with a variable entrance means that allows entering Sphere means, a gaming balls which have entered the special variable ball entrance means to allow ball entrance, a first ball entrance means not shifted closing ball entrance means based on input ball game ball from a closed state to an open state, the variable to allow ball entrance for ball entrance to gaming balls in ball entrance means, and a second ball entrance means for transition from the closed state to the open state closing ball entrance means based on input ball game ball, a game state means After the game state is transferred to the specific control state, when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means, the first ball entrance means , or the second ball entrance means , the game in the specific control status is performed. The specific control start means for starting is provided, and the game in the specific control state includes a first specific game and a second specific game for giving a higher value to the player than the first specific game, and the specific control is started. means, inlet ball game ball to either the first ball entrance means and the second ball entrance means Wherein the initiating one of the first specific game and second specific game and.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Front view of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention Front view of the game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism Figure showing the movement of the game ball in the discharge route and the clune route An enlarged view of the vicinity of the klune seen from above A view of the non-electric accessory from the back side of the game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of non-electric accessory Enlarged view of the vicinity of non-electric accessory Side view of non-electric accessory Figure showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery The figure which shows the winning / losing table that stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. The figure which shows the distribution table which remembers the value of the random number which relates to the distribution destination of the big hit type Diagram showing the flow chart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning a prize processing for the round game execution gate The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning a prize processing for the operating mouth Diagram showing the flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing the flow chart of the main processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control processing The figure which shows the flowchart of data setting processing The figure which shows the flowchart of fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of game state transition processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the setting processing of the number of rounds The figure which shows the flowchart of the special winning opening opening and closing processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the special winning opening opening processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of the end of opening / closing execution mode. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with an audio emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the number of rounds. Diagram showing the relationship between game results and game status The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory is not opened, the non-electrical accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory is opened, the non-electrical accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism. Front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention An exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the klune seen from diagonally above Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory is not opened, the non-electrical accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism. A perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to the discharge passage after a ball enters the 4-round execution gate. A perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to the communication passage after a ball enters the 4-round execution gate. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory is not opened, the non-electrical accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism. A perspective view showing the flow of game balls being guided to the discharge passage after a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. A perspective view showing the flow of game balls being guided to the communication passage after a ball enters the 16-round execution gate Front view of the game board according to the third embodiment of the present invention An exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the klune seen from diagonally above The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory is not opened, the non-electrical accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism. Top view of the klune when a ball enters the 4-round execution gate The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory is not opened, the non-electrical accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism. Top view of the clune when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate Front view of a game board according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention An enlarged view of the vicinity of the klune seen from above Front view of a game board according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention Figure showing the internal structure of a non-electric accessory The figure which shows the internal structure of the non-electrical accessory when the entry to the 16 round execution gate occurs The figure which shows the internal structure of the non-electrical accessory when a ball enters the non-electrical accessory The figure which shows the internal structure of the non-electrical accessory after the ball has entered the non-electrical accessory. The figure which expanded the crune concerning 6th Embodiment of this invention, and was seen from the upper side. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning a prize processing for the round game execution gate The figure which shows the flowchart of the setting processing of the number of rounds The figure which shows the flowchart of the setting processing for the round game execution gate The figure which shows the flowchart of production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the decision processing of the round game execution gate The figure which shows an example of the determination process of an execution gate definite production, and an execution gate definite production. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory is not opened, the non-electrical accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism. The figure which shows the other example of the determination process of an execution gate definite production, and an execution gate definite production. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory is not opened, the non-electrical accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electrical accessory is opened, the non-electrical accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism. The figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process for round game execution gates which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the decision processing of the round game execution gate The figure which shows an example of the determination process of an execution gate definite production, and an execution gate definite production. The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for the round game execution gates which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the setting processing of the number of rounds The figure which shows the flowchart of the decision processing of the round game execution gate Figure showing the gate reset effect The figure which shows an example of the determination process of an execution gate definite production after execution of a gate reset production, and an execution gate definite production. Front view of a game board according to a modification of the present invention Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism The figure which shows the timing chart of opening / closing of the blade member, the valve main body, and the plate at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward (on the front side). 12 and 12.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is arranged in front of the inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions being the support side, and on both left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so that one of the parts is supported on the support side so as to be rotatable forward, and the rear door frame 13 is arranged behind the inner frame and one of the left and right side parts is supported on the rear side. And a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) provided at the turning front end thereof. This locking device has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame. Have These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially oval window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of glass so as to be colorless and transparent, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be colorless and transparent.
Further, the front door frame 13 is provided with a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of a light emitting means configured by various lamp portions provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion. The speaker unit 24 is provided on both left and right sides of 23 and outputs a sound effect or the like according to the game situation, and an upper bulge 25 and a lower bulge 26 provided below the window 21. There is.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and both are bulged forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 11) provided in the back pack unit, and while aligning them in a row, toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 11) side. It has a function to guide.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 25a.

  Further, the front door frame 13 includes a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. The firing handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to fire a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. To do. The firing handle 27 changes the firing intensity, that is, the momentum of firing, of the game ball that is fired toward the game area, by changing the amount of rotation operation thereof.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on the inner frame. The aforementioned game area is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. This game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for guiding the game ball to the game area. The guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27. The played game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area.

  The guide rail 34 is formed such that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side thereof as the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31, a general winning opening 35 provided in each opening, an upper working opening (first starting ball entering section) 36, a lower working opening (second starting ball entering section) 37, a variable winning device 38, It has an outlet 39 and a non-electric accessory 51. The non-electric accessory 51 is provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. In addition, the game board 31 has an opening 311 provided on the lower right side of the lower operation port 37 and an opening 312 provided on the lower side of the non-electric accessory 51. In addition, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the central part left side and the central part right side, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, and a variable display unit 43 provided on the central part. Have Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

  Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper working opening 36, the lower working opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are provided on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 includes a detection sensor 40a, the upper working opening 36 includes a detection sensor 40b, the lower working opening 37 includes a detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 includes a detection sensor 40d. Is equipped with. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper working port 36 and when a ball enters the lower working port 37. The pachinko machine 10 executes payout of 15 prize balls when a ball has entered the variable winning device 38. Note that the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operating ports 36 and 37 may be different.

  The out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area through this out opening 39. Further, the outlet 39 is provided with a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when a ball enters the outlet 39, unlike when a ball enters the various prize holes.

The non-electric accessory 51 is provided on the lower left side of the game area of the game board 31. Further, the non-electric accessory 51 is provided with a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51, unlike when a prize is inserted into various winning openings. The non-electric accessory 51 will be described later in detail.
It should be noted that the player hits the left with the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 27 as a medium amount, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is changed from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the side of the game area. By shifting to the upper left, the game ball can be guided to the upper working port 36, the non-electric accessory 51, etc. (left striking route).

  Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 40g (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40g is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when a ball enters each through gate 41, unlike when a ball enters each winning hole.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and it is not only a mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the outlet 39, the game ball entering the various winning ports is also referred to as a prize. Further, the entry into the through gate 41 means to continue flowing down in the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as a prize like the entry into the various winning openings.

  The upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 are unitized as a working port device and installed on the game board 31. Each of the operating ports 36, 37 is opened upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged above and the lower operating port 37 is arranged below. Are installed side by side in the vertical direction. The lower operation port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) configured by a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric accessory 37a is connected to the electric accessory drive unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is driven by the electric accessory driver 37b to be set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state). The closed state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer to the left and right. The open state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

  Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface portion of the upper operation port 36 becomes narrower than that of one game ball. When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper working port 36 becomes wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win the lower working port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can win the lower working port 37 when set to the open state. it can.

  In addition, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult to win a game ball in the lower working opening 37 (a state in which a game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), instead of the closed state and the open state described above. It may be configured to switch between a state in which a game ball is easily won in the operating port 37. Further, the lower working port 37 may be configured such that such switching is not performed by setting the electric accessory 37a, but is performed by displacing the lower working port 37. In such a configuration, the lower working port 37 is configured. 37 does not need to include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a big winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, an opening / closing door 38b for opening and closing the big winning opening 38a, and an opening / closing door 38b. The variable winning drive unit 38c is provided.
The player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 at the maximum, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side portion side, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right hitting route).

Here, the game board 31 is provided with a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front surface side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 is provided with a transparent (or semi-transparent) transparent panel 381a so that the variable winning device 38 can be seen from the front side, and is provided around the transparent panel 381a and is opaque. And a panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21.

  The special winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the special winning opening 38a includes the detection sensor 40d that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening / closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the special winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and projects from the game board 31, thereby closing the opening of the special winning opening 38a and retracting toward the inside of the game board 31 to the game board. By being buried in 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the special winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 38c drives the open / close door 38b to set the open / close door 38b to either the open state or the closed state.

Specifically, the opening / closing door 38b is normally set in a closed state in which gaming balls cannot be won. Then, in the internal lottery, when the player shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, and shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win.
The opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the opening / closing door 38b is set in an open state so that a game ball can enter the special winning opening 38a. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, after setting the opening / closing door 38b in the open state, it is called one round game until it is set in the closed state again.
In this way, the variable winning device 38 has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is inserted and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted, and a predetermined value is set when the game ball is entered. It functions as an opening / closing entrance means for paying out game balls.

The main display device 42 has a main display part 45 and a character object display part 46, and includes a plurality of display devices such as a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting parts are arranged in a predetermined manner, and a dot display. It is arranged and configured.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is smaller than that for one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

  The main display section 45 includes a first result display section 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36, and an internal portion performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. A second result display unit 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 11). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing execution mode is set (or the opening / closing execution mode is set). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the upper working opening 36 as a trigger, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 as a result of stopping the variable display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37 allow a game ball flowing down in the game area to enter and function as a starting ball entering means for executing an internal lottery when entering the game ball.

  The accessory display unit 46 executes the variable display of the pattern by using the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 as a result of the stop of the variable display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric role open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, It may be configured by another type of display device such as a dot matrix. In addition, as the pattern to be variably displayed on the main display section 45 and the accessory display section 46, a configuration of variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration of variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. Alternatively, a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

  The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a kind of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the drop of the game ball. It is composed.

The symbol display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. This symbol display device 47 starts variable display of symbols based on winning in the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. That is, the symbol display device 47 performs variable display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and variable display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 47 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

  The center frame 48 has four first holding lamp parts 49a provided in the upper area of the symbol display device 47 and four second holding lamp parts 49b provided in the right area of the first holding lamp part 49a. , And four third holding lamp portions 49c provided in an area above the first holding lamp portion 49a.

The first holding lamp section 49a is a section for displaying the number of reserved game balls that have won in the upper working opening 36, and is turned on according to the number of reserved balls. The first hold lamp unit 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second holding lamp section 49b is a section for displaying the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower working opening 37, and is turned on in accordance with the number of reserved balls. The second hold lamp section 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display section 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third hold lamp section 49c is a section for displaying the number of held game balls that have won in each of the through gates 41, and is turned on according to the number of held balls. The third hold lamp section 49c can hold up to four game balls and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display section 46.
Each of the holding lamp units 49a to 49c may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 47 described later.

Further, the center frame 48 is provided with a right variable ball entry mechanism 52 provided in a lower right area of the symbol display device 47 and a klune 53 provided in a left area of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. There is.
The right variable ball entry mechanism 52 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then ejects it to the clune 53 and to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. By switching the discharge route to be performed, it has a function of guiding the game ball entered in the inside of the right side variable ball input mechanism 52 to the clune route or the discharge route.
The player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 at the maximum, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, it is possible to guide the game ball to the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 (right hitting route).

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52 has an introduction section 521 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area into the right-side variable entry ball mechanism 52, and a right-side variable entry mechanism with the introduction section 521. A guide passage 522 for guiding the game ball guided to the entrance of 52, a switching unit 523 for switching the destination of the game ball guided in the guide passage 522, an outlet 524 provided at the guide destination of the guide passage 522, and And a guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

  The introduction portion 521 is a blade member 521a provided on the game board 31 so as to close an inlet formed on the right side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and a blade member centered on an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. A pin 521b that rotatably supports the 521a and a blade member drive unit 521c that drives the blade member 521a are provided.

The blade member 521a rotates counterclockwise about the pin 521b to close the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 (one-dot chain line in the figure) and rotates clockwise about the pin 521b. It has an open state (solid line in the figure) that opens the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by moving (see arrow in the figure). In the open state, the blade member 521a is inclined so as to descend toward the entrance side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52.
The blade member driving unit 521c drives the blade member 521a to set the blade member 521a to either the closed state or the open state.

Here, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to a closed state and an open state at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently at a predetermined cycle.
In the present embodiment, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to a closed state for 1.5 sec and an open state for 0.5 sec. Therefore, the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds.
It should be noted that the introduction portion 521 may be configured so as to allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the inside of the right side variable ball entering mechanism 52, the opening / closing timing of the blade member 521a, and the opening / closing. The cycle can be set arbitrarily.

Therefore, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball travels through the blade member 521a using the inclination of the blade member 521a and enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. Yes (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the closed state, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 (one-dot chain line in the figure).

The guide passage 522 is formed in a width such that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the passage at the same time. In addition, the guide passage 522 is bifurcated midway, and has an upstream guide passage 522a located upstream of the branch and two downstream guide passages 522b and 522c located downstream. .
The guide passage 522 is formed transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the inside can be viewed from the front side.

  The upstream guide passage 522a guides the game ball, which is introduced into the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by the introduction portion 521, from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the branch position of the guide passage 522. The upstream guide passage 522a is inclined so as to descend from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 toward the branch position of the guide passage 522. Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a by utilizing the inclination of the upstream guide passage 522a.

The downstream guide passage 522b is provided at a position near the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream side guide passage 522b is formed along the vertically downward direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 522. The downstream guide passage 522b guides the game ball, which has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a, to the discharge port 524.
The downstream guide passage 522c is provided at a position far from the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream guide passage 522c is formed from the branch position of the guide passage 522 to the guide rail 525 for the game ball. The downstream guide passage 522c guides the game ball, which has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a, to the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

  Here, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 includes a detection sensor 40h (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40h is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40h detects the entry of a game ball into the downstream guide passage 522c. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when a ball enters the right-side variable ball entrance mechanism 52, unlike when a ball enters each of the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensor 40h may be any one as long as it can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

  The switching unit 523 rotatably supports the plate 523a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522c and the plate 523a about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. The pin 523b and the plate drive part 523c which drives the plate 523a are provided.

The plate 523a rotates clockwise about the pin 523b to close the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b (two-dot chain line in the figure) and rotates counterclockwise about the pin 523b. As a result, the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522c is closed and the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b is opened (solid line in the figure). In the closed state, the plate 523a is inclined so as to descend toward the downstream guide passage 522c side.
The plate driving unit 523c drives the plate 523a to set the plate 523a to either the closed state or the open state.

Therefore, when the plate driving unit 523c sets the plate 523a to the open state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b and then to the discharge port 524. You will be guided (solid line in the figure). After that, the game ball is discharged to the outside (game area) of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 via the discharge port 524 (discharge route).
On the other hand, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state by the plate drive unit 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 travels down the plate 523a by utilizing the inclination of the plate 523a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 522c, it is guided to the guide rail 525 (two-dot chain line in the figure). After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) (clune route).

Here, the plate 523a is normally set to an open state (discharging route) in which the game ball is not guided to the clune 53. Then, in the internal lottery, when winning the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, and shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the plate 523a is set to the closed state (the clune route) in which the game ball is guided to the clune 53.
Further, the plate 523a is in an open state (discharge route) in which the game ball is not guided to the clune 53 when the detection sensor 40h detects that the game ball has entered the downstream guide passage 522c. Is set again.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the clune 53 determines the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. It functions as a variable entry means that allows entry.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the movement of the game balls on the discharge route and the clune route. Specifically, FIGS. 4 (A) and 4 (B) are diagrams showing the movement of the game ball on the discharge route, and FIGS. 4 (C) and 4 (D) are diagrams showing the movement of the game ball on the clune route. Is.
When the blade member 521a is set to the closed state, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 as shown in FIG. 4 (A) (see arrow in the figure). This is the same whether it is the discharge route or the clune route.

On the other hand, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state, the game ball travels through the blade member 521a by utilizing the inclination of the blade member 521a as shown in FIGS. 4 (B) and 4 (C). And enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52.
When the discharge route is set by setting the plate 523a to the open state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the discharge port 524 as shown in FIG. 4B. (Refer to the arrow in the figure). After that, the game ball is discharged to the outside (game area) of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the discharge port 524.

The game ball discharged to the outside of the right side variable ball input mechanism 52 through the discharge port 524 is changed to the falling direction by the nail 44, so that the upper working port 36, the lower working port 37, and the out port 39 are provided. You will enter the ball.
In this embodiment, the game ball discharged to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 via the outlet 524 has entered the upper working port 36, the lower working port 37, and the out port 39. However, for example, the ball may be designed to enter only the outlet 39. In short, the flow path of the game ball after being discharged to the game area may be designed in any way.
Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge port 524, but the game ball is not discharged to the game area, for example, the same route as the game ball entering the out port 39. You may make it collect | recover through it.

  Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the play route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the guide rail 525 as shown in FIG. 4 (C). (Refer to the arrow in the figure). After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 as shown in FIG.

FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the clune as seen from above.
As shown in FIG. 5, the clune 53 is provided along a disk-shaped rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball guided by the clune 53 via the guide rail 525, and the periphery of the rolling surface 531. And a sidewall 532.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 531 and is formed at three holes 533A to 533C formed at equal intervals with each other and at the center of the holes 533A to 533A. It is provided with a protrusion 534 having three side surfaces that are inclined so as to descend toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 532 side toward the holes 533A to 533C side (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the clune 53 through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C (FIG. (See middle arrow A).

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C includes detection sensors 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) that detect the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensors 40i to 40k are arranged on the back surface side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects the entry into the hole 533C. Detects the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when the balls enter the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when the balls enter the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C is an opportunity to start a round game when winning the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery and transitioning to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after entering the opening / closing execution mode, if a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening / closing door 38b. Is set to an open state, and execution of a round game of a predetermined number of times is started.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game 16 times when the ball enters the hole 533A, and thus starts executing the round game 16 times in the hole 533A. A mark is displayed around the hole 533A so as to suggest that.
Further, the pachinko machine 10 starts the execution of the four round games when the ball enters the holes 533B and 533C, so the execution of the four round games is started in the holes 533B and 533C. The mark is not shown to suggest that.

  Also, the clune 53 is connected to a hole 533A formed on the front side (front side) of the game board 31, and as shown by an arrow B in the figure, a game ball that has entered the hole 533A and dropped downward. Is connected to a communication passage 535 for guiding the non-electric accessory 51 and two holes 533B and 533C formed on the back side (back side) of the game board 31, and as shown by an arrow C in the figure, a hole is formed. It is provided with a discharge passage 536 for discharging the game balls that have entered the balls 533B and 533C and dropped downward to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 6 is a view of the non-electric accessory from the back side of the game board. FIG. 9 is a side view of the non-electric accessory.
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 9, the non-electric accessory 51 has a pair of upper blade members 511 provided above the game board 31 so as to face each other in the horizontal direction, and a lower end portion of each upper blade member 511. A pair of rotating shafts 512 that are fixed and are rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31, and a pair of plate-shaped members 513 whose one end is fixed to each rotating shaft 512, A pair of upper gears 514 concentrically fixed to each rotating shaft 512 are provided.

  The non-electric accessory 51 is fixed to a pair of lower blade members 515 provided below the upper blade members 511 so as to face each other in the horizontal direction, and the upper end portions of the lower blade members 515, and the game is played. A pair of rotation shafts 516 rotatably provided around an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the board 31, a pair of rotation shafts 516 provided so as to mesh with the respective upper gears 514 and fixed concentrically to the respective rotation shafts 516. Lower gear 517 of the above.

In the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51, each upper blade member 511 has a facing surface 511A that faces the horizontal direction and is arranged along the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 6A. . Further, each upper blade member 511 is provided in the game area (on the front side of the game board 31) as shown in FIG.
Each upper blade member 511 is provided so as to have a width such that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the passage 511B formed between the facing surfaces 511A at the same time. Further, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a baffle plate 51A provided above the entrance of the passage 511B. The distance between the upper end of each upper blade member 511 and the baffle plate 51A is smaller than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B when the non-electric accessory 51 is closed.
The non-electric accessory 51 is provided with a cover 518 provided in the game area so as to cover each upper blade member 511 and the passage 511B.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, each plate-shaped body 513 is arranged so as to form an obtuse angle with respect to the facing surface 511A of each upper blade member 511. Specifically, in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51, each plate-shaped member 513 is arranged so as to be inclined so as to approach the passage 511B from the upper end toward the lower end on the rotating shaft 512 side. . Here, each plate-shaped body 513 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the non-electrical accessory 51 includes a passage 51B that guides the game ball that has entered the non-electrical accessory 51 to the back side of the game board 31 through the entrance of the passage 511B, and each plate-shaped member 513 is One end is fixed to each rotary shaft 512 so as to close the discharge port of the passage 51B.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, each lower blade member 515 is arranged so as to form an obtuse angle with respect to the facing surface 511A of each upper blade member 511. Specifically, in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51, the lower blade members 515 are arranged so as to be inclined so as to approach the passage 511B from the upper end toward the lower end on the rotating shaft 516 side. . Further, each lower blade member 515 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, as shown in FIG. Specifically, each lower blade member 515 is provided at a passing position of the game ball guided by the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 of the klune 53. Here, one end of each lower blade member 515 is fixed to each rotation shaft 516 so as to close the discharge port 535A of the communication passage 535.

As described above, the communication passage 535 of the clues 53 described above communicates with the upper side of each lower blade member 515.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6 (A), the game balls guided into the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 enter the holes 533A of the clune 53 and fall downward. It drops toward 515. Then, as shown in FIG. 6 (B), the game balls that have dropped toward the lower blade members 515 rotate the lower blade members 515 about the rotary shafts 516, and thus the lower blade members 515. Push the lower end of the so as to separate it (see arrow A in the figure).
In addition, after the lower end portions of the lower blade members 515 are pushed apart to be separated from each other, the game balls are discharged from the non-electric accessory 51 to the game area through the discharge passages 51C through the openings 312.

  Further, since the rotary shafts 516 and the lower gears 517 rotate with the rotation of the lower blade members 515, the upper gears 514 rotate with the rotation of the lower gears 517. Then, each upper blade member 511 and each plate-shaped body 513 rotate with the rotation of each upper gear 514 (see arrow B in the figure). As a result, the non-electric accessory 51 moves from the closed state to the open state.

  Here, the non-electric auditors accessory 51 includes a non-electric auditors accessory opening detection sensor 519 (see FIG. 11) that detects the transition from the closed state to the open state. Note that the non-electrical accessory release detection sensor 519 may be of any type as long as it can detect the release of the non-electric accessory 51, and for example, a contact sensor or the like can be adopted. .

The distance between the upper end of each upper blade member 511 and the baffle plate 51A is wider than that of one game ball as shown in FIG. 6B when the non-electric accessory 51 is open. Therefore, the game ball can enter the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B when the non-electric accessory 51 is open.
Here, each plate-shaped body 513 is rotated about each rotation shaft 512 so as to close the passage 51B when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened.

Therefore, the game ball that has entered the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B is guided to the back surface side of the game board 31 through the passage 51B, and then each plate-shaped body around each rotary shaft 512. By rotating 513, the lower ends of the plate-shaped bodies 513 are pushed apart so as to be separated from each other.
In addition, after the lower ends of the plate-shaped members 513 are pushed apart so as to be separated from each other, the game balls are discharged from the non-electric accessory 51 into the game area through the discharge passage 51C through the openings 312.

  Further, since the rotary shafts 512 and the upper gears 514 rotate with the rotation of the plate-shaped bodies 513, the lower gears 517 rotate with the rotation of the upper gears 514. Then, each lower blade member 515 rotates with the rotation of each lower gear 517. As a result, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

  The non-electric accessory 51 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and when it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, it is an opportunity to start the round game. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the shift to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, and after the shift to the open / close execution mode, if the ball enters the non-electric accessory 51, the open / close door 38b. Is set to an open state, and execution of a round game of a predetermined number of times is started.

  Here, the ball entering the non-electric accessory 51 is determined by detecting whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge passage 51C by the detection sensor 40f. In other words, in the open state of the non-electrical accessory 51, the game ball that has entered the non-electrical accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B and the non-electrical accessory 51 in the closed state, via the communication passage 535. The game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 is determined to be a ball entering the non-electric accessory 51.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing a round game 16 times when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51, so the non-electric accessory 51 has 16 rounds. The character "16R" which means to start the execution of the game is displayed (see FIG. 2).
In the following description, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A that start the execution of the 16th round game are referred to as the 16th round execution gate, and the holes 533B and 533C that start the execution of the 4th round game are 4 times. It is called a round execution gate, and the 16 round execution gate and the 4 round execution gate are also collectively referred to as a round game execution gate.

Therefore, the non-electric accessory 51 has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is inserted and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted, and the game ball enters the self. Based on this, it functions as an opening / closing ball entering means for shifting from the open state to the closed state.
Then, the non-electrical accessory 51 is a plate-shaped member 513 (first receiving portion) that receives the game ball that has entered the non-electrical accessory 51, and each lower blade member 515 that receives the game ball that has entered the hole 533A. (Second receiving portion), by receiving the game ball in each plate 513, to transition from the open state to the closed state, by receiving the game ball in each lower blade member 515, closed state To an open state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing ball means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and closes by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion. It was transitioning from the state to the open state. On the other hand, the opening / closing ball means includes, for example, a drive unit that sets the opening / closing ball means to either a closed state or an open state, and a sensor that detects the ball entering the game ball. The open / close ball entrance means may be moved from the open state to the closed state by the drive unit based on the detection of the ball entry. In short, the opening / closing ball means has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and is opened based on the ball entering the game ball. To the closed state.

  In addition, the clune 53 allows the game balls that have entered the clune 53 to enter, and the holes 533B and 533C (first holes) that do not shift the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game balls. Hole 533A (second ball entering) that allows the game ball entered into the clune 53 to enter, and shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. Section) and. This clune 53 has a rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball that has entered the clune 53, and the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 and roll. A game ball rolling on the moving surface 531 is inserted.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53, and the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 531 are inserted. . On the other hand, the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are, for example, the distributions for distributing the game balls entered in the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the distribution mechanism may distribute the game balls to the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion with the same or different probabilities. In short, the variable ball entrance means only needs to include the first ball entrance section and the second ball entrance section.

  Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A are 16 round execution gates for starting execution of 16 round games. Further, the holes 533B and 533C are four-round execution gates for starting execution of four round games. Therefore, the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Value is given to the player.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets a predetermined number (four times in the present embodiment) of the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 at the time of entering a game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C, so that a predetermined number of times is set. The game is started in the open / close execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out, and when the game balls enter the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed is greater than a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, a number of times). (16 times), the game is started in the open / close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is set by setting the number of times of opening / closing the variable winning device 38, and thus each hole 533B, 533C. Although a higher value is given to the player than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball is entered, the holes 533B and 533C are set by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, for example. A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball is entered. In short, the open / close execution mode and the game in the open / close execution mode started when the game ball enters the second entrance section are the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first entrance section. It suffices to give the player a higher value than the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate for starting execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games, and each hole is The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between each of the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate may not be fixed. For example, the correspondence may be changed based on the result of the internal lottery. May be. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can extend the playability and can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

7 and 8 are enlarged views of the vicinity of the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 7 (A) and FIG. 8 (A) are diagrams showing a state in which the game ball has dropped toward the non-electric accessory 51 in the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. 7 (B) and FIG. 8 (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the game sphere after that.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the non-electrical accessory 51 includes a rotation distribution mechanism 51D provided on the upper left of the baffle plate 51A.
The rotation distribution mechanism 51D is formed on the rotation shaft 51D1 centered on the rotation shaft 51D1 and the rotation shaft 51D1 equidistantly from the rotation shaft 51D1 so that the rotation distribution mechanism 51D is rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the surface of the game board 31. The rotary blade 51D2 is provided with three stoppers 51D2 and a stopper 51D3 provided below the rotary shaft 51D1.

Among the three rotary blades 51D2, the upper rotary blade 51D2 is not electrically driven as it goes upward as shown in FIG. 7A when the right rotary blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. It is inclined so as to approach the accessory 51.
In this state, the game ball that has fallen through the left side of the wind turbine located on the upper right of the rotary distribution mechanism 51D has the upper rotary blade 51D2 and the left rotary blade 51D2 of the three rotary blades 51D2. It will fall during this period (see the arrow in FIG. 7 (A)).

  The game ball dropped between the upper rotary blade 51D2 and the left rotary blade 51D2 rotated the rotary shaft 51D1 counterclockwise through the rotary blade 51D2 as shown in FIG. 7B. After that, the ball passes through the left side of the non-electrical accessory 51 without entering the non-electrical accessory 51 (see the arrow in FIG. 7B). Then, of the three rotary blades 51D2, the left rotary blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. As a result, the rotary shaft 51D1 stops its rotation. In addition, the game ball that has passed the left side of the non-electric accessory 51 will then enter the outlet 39.

On the other hand, among the three rotary blades 51D2, the upper rotary blade 51D2 moves upward as shown in FIG. 8A when the left rotary blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. As it goes, it inclines so as to move away from the non-electric accessory 51.
In this state, the game ball that has fallen through the left side of the wind turbine located on the upper right of the rotary distribution mechanism 51D has the upper rotary blade 51D2 and the right rotary blade 51D2 of the three rotary blades 51D2. It will fall during this time (see the arrow in FIG. 8 (A)).

  The game ball dropped between the upper rotary blade 51D2 and the right rotary blade 51D2, after rotating the rotary shaft 51D1 clockwise through the rotary blade 51D2, as shown in FIG. 8B. Then, the player will enter the non-electric accessory 51 (see the arrow in FIG. 8B). Then, of the three rotary blades 51D2, the right rotary blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. As a result, the rotary shaft 51D1 stops its rotation.

In this way, the rotation distribution mechanism 51D distributes the game balls falling toward the non-electrical accessory 51 to the left and right according to the rotation of the player, and the left route that does not allow the game balls to enter the non-electrical accessory 51. , Has a function of alternately switching between the right route for inserting a game ball into the non-electric accessory 51.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it difficult for the game ball, which has fallen toward the non-electrical accessory 51 against the player's intention, to enter the non-electrical accessory 51. It can be reflected easily.

In the present embodiment, the rotational distribution mechanism 51D is only the first stage, but the second stage rotational distribution mechanism 51D may be provided, and the third and subsequent rotational distribution mechanisms 51D are further provided. May be. According to this, it is possible to make it more difficult for the game ball that has fallen toward the non-electrical accessory 51 against the intention of the player to enter the non-electrical accessory 51, and to further enhance the intention of the player. It can be reflected easily.
Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation distribution mechanism 51D distributes the game ball falling toward the non-electric accessory 51 to the left and right according to the rotation of the player, but the game ball is used by a method other than the rotation. May be distributed.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
The display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas as shown in FIG. 10, and in each display area, a left symbol column Z1, a middle symbol column Z2, and a right symbol are sequentially arranged from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, eight kinds of symbols consisting of the numbers “1” to “8” are arranged in ascending order from the lower side to the upper side, and “8” is arranged next to “1”. Is configured. In addition, in FIG. 10, the center line of each display area is indicated by a dashed line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbols, the effect for game play is executed on the display screen G. The production for this game use is changed from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. End with state.
That is, the game time is until the predetermined stop result is displayed after the variable display is started on the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 47 based on the winning of each of the operation ports 36 and 37.

  The manner in which the symbols are displayed on the symbol display device 47 in a variable manner is not limited to this, but is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbols in the symbol column, the scroll direction of each symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the design of each symbol row may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined instead of the mode in which only the numbers are used, or the mode in which only the pictures are used.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 11, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 performs a payout control device 70 that executes the payout control that causes the payout device 71 to pay out the game balls, and a power supply that executes the discharge control that causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to shoot the game balls. And a firing control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game control (main control), and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. This substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace upon its opening, or may have a trace structure for leaving a trace upon its opening. Specifically, as the trace means, a board box is configured by joining a plurality of case bodies, and a joining portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating the case bodies is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace that the adhesive layer has been peeled off because it remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 forming the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be configured into individual chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply to hold the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described later in detail.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed, and is a volatile storage unit that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, holding ball storage areas 64b, and electric-worker holding areas 64c. These areas will be described later in detail.

  The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60, the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, and the non-electric accessory release detection sensor 519. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. The output port of the MPU 62 is an electric accessory driving unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower working opening 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. The blade member drive unit 521c that opens and closes the 521a, the plate drive unit 523c that opens and closes the plate 523a, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 are connected.

  The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric role object driving unit 37b to open and close the electric role object 37a. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the special winning opening 38a. Further, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the blade member drive unit 521c to open and close the blade member 521a. In the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the plate drive unit 523c to open / close the plate 523a. In addition, in each game, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 to display the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the operation openings 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 to display the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitor board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V output from the power supply / launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives electric power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40k are the general winning opening 35, the upper working opening 36, the lower working opening 37, the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, the through gates 41, and the right variable winning mechanism 52. Alternatively, the holes are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the holes 533A to 533C of the clune 53. The MPU 62, based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40k, wins various winning openings, out openings 39, through gates 41, right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and holes 533A to 533C of the clune 53. Judgment (judgment judgment) is performed. The MPU 62 executes the internal lottery based on the winning determination to the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37.

  The payout control device 70 executes a payout control that causes the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball or a lending ball (a game ball to lend to a player during a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. To do.

  The power supply / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply / launch control device 80 generates operation power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / launch control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and storage to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 executes the firing control for causing the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the gaming ball. Here, the game ball launching mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34. The power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid to launch a game ball when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 12, the MPU 62 uses the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 to perform internal lottery and the like. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot occurrence lottery, uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot occurs, and determines whether or not the reach display is generated. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display duration time in the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 in a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37 is in the electric opening state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 11) of the RAM 64.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is regularly updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are RAM64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. It is stored in the reserved sphere storage area 64b (see FIG. 11) provided as the acquisition information storage means in FIG. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is stored in the electric-role holding area 64c (see FIG. 11) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41. To be done.

  The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reserved area Ra, a second result display section reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE.

  The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas, namely, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 time-sequentially sets each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 by using the set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as the hold information. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62, in the case where the winning on the upper working opening 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, holds the reservation information in the order of the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4. Store in time series.

As described above, since the first result display holding area Ra has four storage areas, the maximum winning of the game balls to the upper working opening 36 is set to four. Further, the first result display holding area Ra includes a storage area for writing the number of holdings stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
It should be noted that the number of reserves related to the upper operation port 36 is not limited to four and may be any number, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, and is a single number. May be.

  The second result display section holding area Rb provided as the second acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the sets of the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in chronological order in the areas Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball into the lower working opening 37. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62, in the case where the winning on the lower working opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, holds the reservation information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4. Store in time series.

In this way, the second result display holding area Rb is provided with four storage areas, so that up to four game balls can be won in the lower working opening 37. In addition, the second result display holding area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of holdings stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
It should be noted that the number of reserves relating to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four and may be arbitrary, and may be another plural such as two, three, or five or more, and is a singular. May be.

  The execution area AE is the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb when the variable display of the respective result display portions 45a and 45b is started. Is an area for moving.

The power combination holding area 64c includes four storage areas like the first result displaying section holding area Ra and the second result displaying section holding area Rb. Therefore, a maximum of four game balls are won for each through gate 41.
It should be noted that the number of reserved gates associated with each through gate 41 is not limited to four, but may be arbitrary, and may be another plural number such as two, three, or five or more, and is a single number. May be.

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 250, for example, by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and reaching the maximum value 250 and then returning to 0. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric power reserve area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41. It
Then, the MPU 62 performs a lottery on whether or not to bring the electric accessory 37a of the lower working port 37 into the electric role open state, based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 64c (electric role). Opening lottery).

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequencies at which the game balls can be won in the lower working opening 37 are different from each other by setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state is relatively low, and a frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. It has a relatively high high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

  In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state is the same in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both are 4/5). However, the high-frequency support mode sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state more frequently when the electric role is released than in the low-frequency support mode, and sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state. The one-time opening time is also longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state during each opening of the electric role opened once is shorter than the opening time of one time. Further, the high-frequency support mode is, compared with the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role) that is waited after the completion of the electric accessory release lottery until the next electric accessory release lottery is performed. The duration of one variation display on the object display unit 46 is short.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game balls are more likely to win the lower working opening 37, as compared with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working opening 36 than in the lower working opening 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will win the lower working opening 37 is higher than the upper working opening 36.
Then, when a winning of the lower working opening 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.

  The configurations of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured such that the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery is higher than that in the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of securing time may be prepared, and the high frequency support mode may be configured so that a short securing time can be easily selected as compared with the low frequency support mode. May be shortened. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high-frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the low-frequency support mode. You may comprise so that it may be made relatively high compared with.

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 599. . Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it makes a loop. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserve ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display reserve area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36, and the game ball wins the lower working opening 37. It is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at a timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes the jackpot occurrence lottery (win / win lottery) based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a win / loss table in which the values of random numbers that win the big hit are stored.
As shown in FIG. 13, among the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the big hit is stored in the hit table storage area 63a (see FIG. 11) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit information group storage means. It is stored as (a win / loss information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / missing lottery modes, a low-probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big hit and a high-probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big hit. . The win / loss table is a win / loss table (low probability win / loss information group) for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 13A, and a win / loss table (high probability win / loss information for the high probability mode) shown in FIG. Group) and.
The MPU 62 executes the jackpot occurrence lottery by comparing these win / loss tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These win / loss tables have a plurality of jackpot occurrence results (win / win results) of “big hit”, “special miss result”, and “normal miss result”.
Specifically, in the gaming state in which the win / loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the jackpot occurrence, as shown in FIG. 13A, there are two random number values for the "jackpot win". Is.
On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the win / loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to during the lottery for jackpot occurrence, as shown in FIG. 13B, there are 21 random number values for “jackpot win”. Is. Here, the value of the random number that is a big hit win stored in the win / loss table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number that is a "big win win" stored in the win / loss table for the high probability mode.

  It should be noted that the value and the number of random numbers stored in each win / loss table are arbitrary, and the high-probability mode has only to have a higher probability of being a “big hit” compared to the low-probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the “big hit” stored in the win / loss table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes “big hit” stored in the win / loss table for the low probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the value of the random number to be the “big hit” stored in the win / loss table for the low probability mode.

Further, in each win / no win lottery mode, except for the value of the random number which is “big hit”, the big hit is not won and the result is out.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of disconnection results, that is, "special disconnection result (small hit result)" and "normal disconnection result". The result of these deviations is common in that none of them is a trigger for shifting to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special disengagement result" is a trigger to shift to the open / close execution mode, whereas the "normal disengagement result" is not a trigger to transition to the open / close execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 29 by incrementing the previous value by 1 each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display reserve area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36, and the game ball wins the lower working opening 37. It is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at a timing.
Then, when a big hit occurs, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the big hit type based on the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a distribution table that stores the value of a random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type.
As shown in FIG. 14, the value of the random number related to the sorting destination of the jackpot type is stored in the sorting table (sorting table) in the sorting table storage area 63b (see FIG. 11) of the ROM 63 provided as the sorting information group storage unit. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 14A and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 14B. ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first allocation table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display holding area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper working opening 36. It is a table that is referred to when performing a lottery for jackpot types.
As shown in FIG. 14A, the first distribution table includes “low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)”, “implicit small round high accuracy result (latent high probability result corresponding to small round). ) ”,“ Explicit small round high accuracy result (high probability result corresponding to small round) ”, and“ most favorable result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability) ”as the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first allocation table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are allocated to “low accuracy result” and “10 to 14” are “implicitly small. The results are distributed to "high accuracy result of round", "15 to 19" are allocated to "high accuracy result of explicit round", and "20 to 29" are allocated to "most advantageous result".

The second allocation table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display holding area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. It is a table that is referred to when performing a lottery for jackpot types.
As shown in FIG. 14B, the second distribution table has two distribution results of “low probability result” and “most favorable result” as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second allocation table, among the values "0-29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0-9" are allocated to "low accuracy results" and "10-29" are allocated as "most advantageous results". ".

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winning / losing lottery mode after ending the opening / closing execution mode (2) Support mode after ending the opening / closing execution mode (3) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode

First, the difference between the winning / winning lottery modes of (1) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the win / loss lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, regardless of the win / loss lottery mode before the end of the opening / closing execution mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is reached in the win / loss lottery.
"Unspecified small round high accuracy result", "Explicit small round high accuracy result", and "most advantageous result" have a high probability that the win / loss lottery mode will be high after the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the win / loss lottery mode before the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is the distribution result set to the mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until the "big win" is reached in the win / loss lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of game times reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

The “non-explicit small round high-precision result” is a distribution result that maintains the support mode before the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Here, when the support mode before the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode continues at least until the “big hit” in the win / loss lottery.
“Explicit small round high-precision result” and “most favorable result” are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until the "big hit" is achieved in the winning / discarding lottery.

  The difference in the manner of (3) the open / close control of the variable winning device 38 in the open / close execution mode will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 238, and then returning to 0. .
The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserve ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display reserve area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 36, and the game ball wins the lower working opening 37. It is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at a timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the result is "normally out of stock" without "big hit" in the win / loss lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b in the case where the "out-of-regular result" is obtained without the "big hit" in the win / loss lottery. By comparing and, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the reach display is generated, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores the values of random numbers related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63c (see FIG. 11) of the ROM 63.

  Here, in the win / loss lottery, when the result is “big hit” and is distributed to the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 shows the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Further, in the win / loss lottery, when the result is “big hit” and is distributed to the “low probability result” in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. Is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Furthermore, in the win / loss lottery, it becomes a "big win", and in the sorting lottery, if it is distributed to the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" or "explicit small round high accuracy result", or in the win / win lottery In the case where the result is “Special Outcome Result” without becoming, the symbol display device 47 is not a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result, but is selected in the case where the result is “Normal Outcome Result” in the win / loss lottery. A combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not displayed is stopped and displayed on the activated line L.

  Reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (in the winning / winning lottery, it becomes a “big hit” and is distributed to the “most advantageous result” or “low probability result” in the sorting lottery. In the case of), regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is when the special combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed (in the winning / winning lottery, it becomes a “big hit”, and in the sorting lottery, “unspecified small round high accuracy result” or “explicit small round high” If the result is distributed to the “probability result”, or if the result is a “special failure result” without being a “big hit” in the win / loss lottery), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The reach display mode is such that, among the plurality of symbol columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, some symbol columns (for example, the symbol column Z1 and the symbol column Z3) are placed on the activated line L. By the stop display, the same symbol combination is displayed to suggest the stop result, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “big hit” in the winning / winning lottery after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 by generating the reach display and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. It is possible to make the player expect that the result may have been distributed to the “low probability result” or the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery.

  The form of the reach display is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed, while the remaining symbol sequence is variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background. Alternatively, each symbol row may be reduced or displayed, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 47. With the expected effect, after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the player is expected to have become a “big hit” in the winning / winning lottery. Refers to the production. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display and the notice display described above.

The advance notice will not be a “big win” in the win / win lottery if the “big win is won” in the win / win lottery or if the “special failure result” is not given in the win / win lottery This is an expected effect that makes it easier to generate an effect than in the case of the "normal disengagement result". Instead of facilitating the production of the effects, this notice display may facilitate the selection of the effects having a low appearance rate, or may combine these.
It should be noted that the lottery as to whether or not to generate the reach display was executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery or not as to whether to generate the advance notice display is executed by the voice emission control device 90. .

The mode of the notice display is that some of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 among the plurality of symbol columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 are variably displayed, and some symbol columns (for example, A predetermined character is displayed in a situation where a plurality of symbol columns (for example, symbol columns Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed after the symbol column Z1) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, or a reach display is generated. Are displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display is generated both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set to occur more easily when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done.
The notice display is not limited to this. For example, the background may be changed and displayed, or the form of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and reaching 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once every time a normal process described below is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 45 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. The display durations will be described later in detail.

<Various processes executed by main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes a timer interrupt process and a normal process for advancing a game, and a main process which is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process, the normal process, and the main process will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, as well as NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 15, the MPU 62 executes steps S101 to S106 periodically (for example, in a 2 msec cycle).

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes the reading process of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to the various winning openings detect the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets the prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 detects the winning of the game ball, the prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls which is the specific unit number. To the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to perform payout of prize balls, based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

  Moreover, in step S101, the MPU 62 executes a process of reading the non-electric accessory release detection sensor 519. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the state of the non-electrical accessory release detection sensor 519, determines the state, and stores it in the RAM 64 as non-electric accessory release information. When the MPU 62 determines that the non-electrical accessory release detection sensor 519 detects the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51, the MPU 62 executes a predetermined process. This predetermined process will be described in detail later.

  In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI and updates it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. To do. Note that the MPU 62 resets the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it when the maximum value is reached when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

  In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and updates the values. The subsequent value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Note that the MPU 62 resets the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the maximum value is reached when adding 1 to the previous value of each of the counters C1 to C4.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a through winning process. In the winning process for this through, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40g corresponding to each through gate 41 detects the winning of the game ball, the electric auditors release counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the electric power holding area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the third holding lamp section 49c, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 turns on the third hold lamp unit 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that can be won in the through gate 41 is four, and the third number of reserve lamps 49c is turned on by a number corresponding to the number of game balls.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for a round game execution gate.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the round game execution gate will be described in detail.

<Winning process for round game execution gate>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for a round game execution gate.
In the winning process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S204 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 executes 16 rounds by determining whether or not the detection sensors 40f and 40i corresponding to the 16 round execution gate (the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A) detect the entry of a game ball. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the gate.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has entered the 16 round execution gate, it sets the 16 round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S202. The 16 round execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the 16 round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the 16-round execution gate, it corresponds to the 4-round execution gate (hole 533B and hole 533C) in step S203. By determining whether or not the detection sensors 40j and 40k detect the entry of the game ball, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate, it sets the 4-round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S204. This 4-round execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the four-round execution gate, it does not execute the processing of step S204 and thereafter, and wins the game for the round game execution gate. The process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt processing, the processing after step S106 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S106, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operating port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the working port will be described in detail.

<Winning process for working port>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S307 as shown in FIG.

  In step S301, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper working opening 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the gaming ball has won (starting winning) in the upper working opening 36. To determine. When the MPU 62 determines in step S301 that the game ball has won in the upper working opening 36, in step S302, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the first result display holding area Ra and holds it. The number is set as a first start pending storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the first result display holding area Ra. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S305 and the subsequent steps.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S301 that the game ball has not been won in the upper working opening 36, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower working opening 37 wins the game ball in step S303. By determining whether or not is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the lower working opening 37 (starting winning).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S303 that the game ball has not won in the lower working opening 37, it ends the winning processing for the working opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S303 that the game ball has won the lower working opening 37, in step S304, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reserves stored in the second result display reserve area Rb, The reserved number is set as a second starting reserved memory number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the second result display retaining area Rb. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S305 and the subsequent steps.

After executing the processing of step S302 or step S304, the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting pending storages set in step S302 or step S304 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine if there is.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the number N of startup pending memories is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the working opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the number N of startup pending storages is less than the upper limit value, it updates the value of the number N of startup pending storages by adding 1 in step S306.

  In step S307, the MPU 62 sets the combination of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interruption process among the empty storage areas of the result display section holding area. The information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number N of startup suspension memories updated in step S306 as suspension information.

  For example, when the first startup pending storage number RaN is set in step S302, the MPU 62 determines each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of values is stored as the hold information in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first result display holding area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup holding storage number RaN updated in step S306. For example, when the MPU 62 sets “3” in the first startup hold storage number RaN in step S302, the MPU 62 sets the storage area corresponding to “4” of the first startup hold storage number RaN updated in step S306. The reservation information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

  Further, for example, when the second start pending storage number RbN is set in step S304, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of each value is stored in the first result storage area of the second result display section hold area Rb as the hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S306. To do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets “3” in the second startup pending storage number RbN in step S304, the MPU 62 sets the storage area corresponding to “4” in the second startup pending storage number RbN updated in step S306. The reservation information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

In step S307, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first holding lamp section 49a or the second holding lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the first holding lamp unit 49a or the second holding lamp unit 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. In addition, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that can be won in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is four, and the first retaining lamp section 49a or the second retaining lamp section 49b can retain the retained number. Lights up to the number corresponding to.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later to be started up when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process which is a main process for advancing a game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S414 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S401 to S409 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S408 to S411 when a remaining time occurs, and executes steps S412 and subsequent steps in accordance with the determination result of step S408. Run.

  In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a timer interrupt process or an external output process for transmitting the command set in the previous normal process to each sub-side control device. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and when it is determined that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70. Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for production such as a command corresponding to a game game effect or a command corresponding to an opening / closing execution mode is set, and the effect command is determined. If it is determined that the effect is set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  In step S402, the MPU 62 updates the fluctuation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS and updates it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . The MPU 62 resets the value of the fluctuation type counter CS to 0 and clears it when the maximum value is reached when 1 is added to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In step S403, the MPU 62 executes the game number control process for advancing the game number. In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes the winning / discarding lottery and the sorting lottery, determines the information relating to the design finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 47, and finally the stop display on the main display unit 45. The determination of information related to is executed.
In step S404, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes a process of transitioning to each game state such as the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game number control process of step S403 and the game state transition process of step S404 will be described in detail later.

In step S405, the MPU 62 executes a demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed without starting a new game time after the game time ends. However, if it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.
The audio emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S405. For example, when the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval at which the process of step S405 is repeatedly executed is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the process of step S405 and reaches 7500 when the start waiting period is reached. Is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, if the MPU 62 starts a new game time while counting the number of executions of the process of step S405, it resets the count value.

  In step S <b> 406, the MPU 62 executes the electric role support process for executing the drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided on the lower operation port 37. In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role open lottery based on the value of the electric role open counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and also performs the electric role open lottery. When winning, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

  In step S407, the MPU 62 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball firing control process, the MPU 62 causes the power / firing control device 80 to perform firing control for firing the game ball based on the player rotating the firing handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball by exciting a solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is excited so as to shoot a game ball with a shooting strength according to the amount of rotation operation of the shooting handle 27. Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

  In step S408, the MPU 62 determines whether the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it is confirmed that a power failure has occurred. It should be noted that this power failure flag is cleared at the next execution of the main processing.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by assigning 1 to the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by assigning 0 to the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

  When the MPU 62 determines in step S408 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 62 executes the process at the time of power failure after step S412 without executing the process after step S409. Specifically, in step S412, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S413, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S414, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S408 that the power failure flag is not set, in step S409, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, the current normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S409 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not come, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S410, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and then in step S411. At, the change type counter CS is updated. Note that the MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S408 to S411 until it determines in step S409 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S409 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes step S401 again to execute the next process. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S512 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing when power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (the control board of the sound emission control device 90, etc.) to become operable. ) Has elapsed.

  In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that 1 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S502. If the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S503 and the subsequent steps.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S502. For example, when the interval at which the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S502 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the count reaches 10,000. The configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S503, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S504, the MPU 62 determines whether a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power / firing control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S509 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S505 whether or not the power outage flag is set in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64. To do.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S505 that the power failure flag is not set, the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S509 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S505 that the power failure flag is set, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S506.
In step S507, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S506 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S506 with the RAM determination value stored in normal processing step S413 (processing at the time of power interruption), and when these match, , The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S507 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S509 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S507, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S508.

  The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 during the power interruption process. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by writing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch is on, determines in step S505 that the power failure flag is not set, or the RAM determination value in step S507. If it is determined that is not normal, the processing from step S509 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S509, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S510.

  Therefore, for example, a game hall manager can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of the game hall business. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the power failure monitoring board 65 has not confirmed the occurrence of a power failure or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the processing of step S508 or step S510, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (the control board of the sound emission control device 90, etc.) in step S511, and in step S512, a timer interrupt is performed. The generation of the process is permitted, and the process shifts to the normal process described above.
The sub-side control board recognizes that the communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed by receiving the initial command transmitted in step S511, and executes its own initialization. To do.

<Game time control processing>
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game number control process.
In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S609 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that it is in the open / close execution mode, it ends the game number control processing without executing the processing of step S602 and subsequent steps. Therefore, when it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in effect, the MPU 62 does not start the game times regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether the open / close execution mode is in operation by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress, in step S602, whether or not the main display unit 45 is displaying fluctuations, that is, the game game is in progress. Or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is not being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 62 executes the game time start processing of steps S603 to S605.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is being variably displayed, the MPU 62 executes the game-time progression processing of steps S606 to S609.

First, the game times start process of steps S603 to S605 will be described.
In step S603, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reserves stored in the first result display section reserve area Ra and the number of reserves stored in the second result display section reserve area Rb, and reserves these numbers. It is determined whether the total number CRN of is less than or equal to "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S603 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", the game number control process ends.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S603 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S604 the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Ra. A data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for digesting the game is executed. After that, in step S605, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start the variable display and executes the fluctuation start process for digesting the game time, and ends the game time control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process of step S604 and the variation start process of step S605 will be described in detail.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S711 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second startup hold storage number RbN of the second result display holding area Rb set in step S304 of the winning opening winning process is "0" or less. To do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second startup pending storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S706, and proceeds to step S701. When it is determined that the second startup pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S707 to S711 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit that sets the holding information stored in the first result display unit holding area Ra for the digestion of the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the holding information stored in the holding area for use Rb for digesting game times.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second startup pending storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit and does not execute the second result display unit. Data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working opening 37, the MPU 62 moves to the upper working opening 36. The holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is the holding information stored in the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for digestion once.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S706 will be described.
In step S702, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first startup hold storage number RaN of the first result display holding area Ra and updates the value.
In step S703, the MPU 62 moves the holding information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display holding area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S704, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process of shifting the reservation information stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reservation information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the reservation information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, the reservation information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and the reservation information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area. Shift to area Ra3.

  In step S705, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. This second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which main display unit 45 of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b is starting the variable display when the game number is exhausted. Is. In this step S705, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, when the game number is exhausted, a variable display is displayed on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Indicates that it is to be started.

In step S706, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the hold information shift has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice light emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a voice emission control device that indicates that the holding information is shifted for the holding information stored in the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working opening 36. It contains information for the 90 to recognize.
The sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp section 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the number of the first reserve lamp parts 49a to be turned on as the number of reserve game balls that have won the upper working opening 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S707 to S711 will be described.
In step S707, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN of the second result display holding area Rb and updates the value.
In step S708, the MPU 62 moves the holding information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display holding area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S709, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the reservation information stored in the storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reservation information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the reservation information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, the reservation information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and the reservation information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area. Shift to area Rb3.

  In step S710, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S710, since the MPU 62 has set the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 45b is variably displayed on the basis of the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37 when the game number is exhausted. Indicates that it is to be started.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the hold information shift has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice light emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a voice emission control device that indicates that the holding information is shifted for the holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working opening 37. It contains information for the 90 to recognize.
The sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp section 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 decreases the number of the second holding lamp parts 49b to be turned on as the number of holding game balls that have won the lower working opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start processing.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S818 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether the winning / winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the win / loss lottery mode is not the high probability mode, in step S802, the win / loss table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 13A) is read from the win / loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is read and it is determined in step S801 that the win / win lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S803, the win / loss table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 13B) is read from the win / loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. read out.

  After executing the processing of step S802 or step S803, the MPU 62 executes the hit / miss determination processing in step S804. In this win / loss determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win / loss table read out in step S802 or step S803 to determine the win / loss result (win / win result). To judge. As described above, the winning / swapping result is one of “big hit”, “special failure result”, and “normal failure result”, and whether the winning / winning lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode. The same is true.

  In step S805, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / decreasing result determined in step S804 is “big hit”. When the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the win / no win result is “big hit”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S806 and subsequent steps, and when it is determined in step S805 that the win / no win result is “big hit”. , And executes the processing from step S812.

First, a process (process after step S806) in the case where the MPU 62 determines that the win / no win result is “big hit” in step S805 will be described.
In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts the variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working opening 36. This means that the first distribution table (see FIG. 14A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S807.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball into the lower working port 37. Since it indicates that the variable display is started, the second distribution table (see FIG. 14B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S808.

  After executing the processing of step S807 or step S808, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination processing in step S809. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S807 or step S808 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( (Sorting result) is determined.

  In step S810, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot result stop result setting process. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S809 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. It is decided according to the distribution result, and the decided information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 compares the sorting result determined in step S809 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, so that the main display unit 45 finally displays a stop pattern. Determine the relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result specifies the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 for each distribution result.

In step S811, the MPU 62 sets in the RAM 64 a flag according to the distribution result determined in step S809. Specifically, the MPU 62 sets the low-probability result flag when it determines that the distribution result is the “low-probability result”, and specifies that it is the “implicit small round high-probability result”. In this case, the implicit small round high-precision result flag is set, and when it is specified that the "explicit small round high-precision result" is specified, the explicit small round high-precision result flag is set and the "most favorable result" is set. If it is specified that the most advantageous result flag is set. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S816 and the subsequent steps.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes the determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, a process (process after step S812) in the case where the MPU 62 determines that the win / no win result is not “big hit” in step S805 will be described.
In step S812, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win / fail result determined in step S804 is a “special out-of-match result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the win / fail result is the “special out-of-match result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S813 and subsequent steps, and when it is determined in step S812 that the win / fail result is not the “extra out-of-match result” In step S815, the processing from step S815 is executed.

In step S813, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the special disengagement result. In the stop result setting process for the special disengagement result, the MPU 62 determines the information regarding the design to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination thereof. The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information relating to the design to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special detachment result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the special disengagement result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the big hit result.
In step S814, the MPU 62 sets the special removal flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 refers to this special disconnection flag to determine whether or not the win / fail result is the “special disconnection result”.

  On the other hand, in step S815, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal disconnection result. In the stop result setting process for the normal disengagement result, the MPU 62 determines the information regarding the design to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination thereof. The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information regarding the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal disengagement result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the big hit result and the stop result table for the special disengagement result.

After executing any one of the processes of step S811, step S814, and step S815, the MPU 62 executes the display continuation time (display continuation period) setting process in step S816.
In the display continuation time setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

  Further, in the display continuation time setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not reach display is generated on the symbol display device 47. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result determined in step S809 is the “low probability result” or the “most advantageous result” and the win / fail result determined in step S804 is the “normal outlier result”. At the same time, when the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display is generated. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Perform the reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display is generated, the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display duration time table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to obtain the change type counter acquired from the change type counter buffer. The display duration time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration time is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and The display continuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in the display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the number of held items increases. Therefore, the display continuation time when the hold information related to the upper operation port 36 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of reservations related to the upper operation port 36 increases. Then, the display continuation time when the holding information related to the lower working port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of holdings related to the lower working port 37 increases. In addition, the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table is set to shorten the display continuation time when the support mode is the high frequency support mode as compared with the case where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration time in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set in a relationship opposite to the above-mentioned relationship, such that the display duration time becomes longer as the number of held pieces increases, and the table may be set depending on the number of held pieces and the support mode. The configuration may not change. Further, the display continuation time table may be set individually for each of the win / fail result and the distribution result.

In step S817, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S817 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The variation command includes information regarding the display duration time. Further, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not reach display is generated.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually Is different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information as to whether or not the reach display is generated, the reach display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information about the display continuation time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not reach display is generated. The variation command may directly include information as to whether or not reach display is generated.

The type command includes information relating to the result of winning or rejecting. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the winning / non-hit result, information related to “big hit”, “special off result”, and “normal off result”. Further, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command, as information related to the distribution result, relates to each of “low accuracy result”, “unspecified small round high accuracy result”, “explicit small round high accuracy result”, and “most favorable result”. Contains information.
In the following description, the winning / discarding result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S818, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start the variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first, based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working opening 36, when the game number is exhausted, Since it indicates that the variable display is started on the result display section 45a, the variable display is started on the first result display section 45a.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second MPU 62 receives the second prize based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37 when the game is completed. Since it is indicated that the variable display is started on the result display unit 45b, the variable display is started on the second result display unit 45b.

Returning to the explanation of the game time control processing, the game time proceeding processing of steps S606 to S609 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S602, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display portion 45 is in the variable display, and when it is determined that the main display portion 45 is in the variable display, for the game time progression of steps S606 to S609. Execute the process.

  In step S606, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S816 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display continuation time counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  When the MPU 62 determines in step S606 that the display duration has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S607. In this variable display process, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display unit 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game number control process.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S606 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S608, the variation end process is executed. In this variation ending process, the MPU 62 performs the information (main information stored in the RAM 64 in any one of steps S810, S813, and S815 of the variation starting process executed when starting the variation display on the main display unit 45). The information regarding the picture finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game game, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display unit 45 that is variably displayed.

Here, the design that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by visually checking the main display unit 45 at the end of the game time. According to this, for example, the manager of the game hall can easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes the pachinko machine 10 to perform the same behavior as when the lottery for jackpot occurrence is won. Can be done on a regular basis.
Further, the display area of the main display unit 45 is smaller than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 are the symbol columns to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It is difficult for the player to recognize as compared with Z1 to Z3. Therefore, at the time of the end of the game, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, not the main display unit 45, to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won. The degree of attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S609, the MPU 62 sets the fluctuation end command. In step S401 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S609 to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game number control process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game time, based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to end the effect of the game play independently without the need to receive the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition processing.
In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S914 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether it is in the open / close execution mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is not in effect, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S902 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is in effect, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S911.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that it is not in the open / close execution mode in step S901 (processing after step S902) will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display unit 45 has been completed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display unit 45 has not ended, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has ended, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the hit / miss result corresponds to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. To determine. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / swapping result is a “big hit winning” or a “special failure result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the winning / disapproval result corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S904.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win / fail result does not correspond to the shift to the open / close execution mode (when it is determined that the win / fail result is the “normal out-of-range result”), the game is played. The state transition process ends.

In step S904, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / miss result is the “special out-of-match result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the winning / disapproval result is the “special out-of-match result”, the MPU 62 sets “2” in the opening / closing counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S905. The opening / closing counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 62 to specify the total number of times of opening / closing the special winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the winning / discarding result is not the “special out-of-match result”, that is, if the winning / discarding result is “big hit”, the distribution result is determined in step S906. Is a small round high accuracy result (“unspecified small round high accuracy result” or “explicit small round high accuracy result”).

  When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is the small round high-accuracy result, it sets "2" to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S907. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is not the small round high accuracy result, that is, when the distribution result is the “low accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result”, the step S906 is executed. In S908, round number setting processing is executed. In this round number setting process, the MPU 62 sets "4" or "16" in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The round counter RC is a counter for the MPU 62 to specify the number of round games when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a round number setting process.
In the round number setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1012 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag (4 round execution flag and 16 round execution flag) stored in the RAM 64.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the non-electrical accessory release 51 is detected by the non-electrical accessory release detection sensor 519 to determine whether or not the non-electrical accessory 51 is open. To do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, it sets a non-open command in step S1003. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the non-opening command set in step S1003 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the non-opening command transmitted from the MPU 62. This processing will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1004. In step S401 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S1004 to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62. This processing will be described in detail later.

  After executing the processing in step S1003 or step S1004, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route.

  In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether the round game execution flag (4 round execution flag or 16 round execution flag) is set in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the round game execution gate (4 round execution gate or 16 round execution gate) after executing the clune route setting process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes step S1006 again.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, it determines in step S1007 whether or not the 4 round execution flag is set in the RAM 64. .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that the 4-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets "4" in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1008.
In step S1009, the MPU 62 sets a 4-round execution command. In step S401 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the 4-round execution command set in step S1009 to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the 4-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62. This processing will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that the 4-round execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the 16-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64), the MPU 62 determines in step S1010. , 16 is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a 16 round execution command. In step S401 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the 16-round execution command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the 16-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62. This processing will be described in detail later.

  After executing the processing in step S1009 or step S1011, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting processing in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route. After that, the MPU 62 ends the round number setting process.

In this way, the MPU 62 sets the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the clean route, and then the right-side variable ball entry based on the game ball entering the round game execution gate (4 round execution gate or 16 round execution gate). Since the mechanism 52 is set to the discharge route, the clune 53 may enter a plurality of game balls depending on the timing of setting the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route. In this case, the MPU 62 will set the number of round games based on the round game execution gate in which one of the plurality of game balls first entered, so that the player's game The attention level of can be improved.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the clune 53 is configured such that a plurality of game balls may be entered, but may be configured such that a plurality of game balls may not be entered.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes having different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as an opening / closing execution mode, a round number defining mode that shifts when the win / loss result is “big hit” and the number of opening / closing that shifts when the win / fail result is “special miss result”. And a specified mode.

The round number defining mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening / closing number defining mode ends on the condition that the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a has been performed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the big winning opening 38a. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This opening / closing number defining mode does not end on the condition of the number of times the round game is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 executes the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a once for each round game. In addition, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state and then sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying any one of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. (2) The total winning number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a reaches the predetermined upper limit number.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition processing, the processing of step S909 and thereafter will be described with reference to FIG.
After performing the processing of any of step S905, step S907, and step S908, in step S909, the MPU 62 sets a timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as a waiting time (waiting period) for opening. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this way, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win / fail result corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the timer counter T sets the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different depending on whether the game result is a "low certainty result" or "most advantageous result" or a game result other than these, etc. The configuration may be made to differ greatly depending on the type.

In step S910, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the shift to the open / close execution mode. Further, the opening command includes information relating to the number of round games when the game result is a “low probability result” or a “most advantageous result”. In step S401 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S910 to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described in detail later.

Next, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in the open / close execution mode in step S901 (processing after step S911) will be described.
In step S911, the MPU 62 executes a special winning opening / closing process.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special winning opening / closing process.
In the special winning opening / closing processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1124, as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether the special winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the special winning opening 38a is not open, it executes the processing of step S1102 and thereafter.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the special winning opening 38a is open, it executes the processing of step S1106 and thereafter.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is not open in step S1101 (processing after step S1102) will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that both the value of the opening / closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the special winning opening / closing processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the timer counter T It is determined whether the value is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the special winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S1104, the special winning opening opening process is executed.
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening process of step S1104 will be described in detail.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process.
In the special winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1207 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / miss result is the “special out-of-match result”.

  When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the winning / disapproval result is the "special out-of-match result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1202, and the step In step S1203, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the winning / disapproval result is not the “special out-of-match result”, the winning counter PC is set to “8” in step S1204, and the distribution result is determined in step S1205. Is a small round high accuracy result (“unspecified small round high accuracy result” or “explicit small round high accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is the small round high-accuracy result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1203 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not the small round high-precision result, it sets "15000" in the timer counter T in step S1206. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

  After executing the processing of step S1203 or step S1206, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution processing of the special winning opening 38a in step S1207. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening process.

The value set in the prize winning counter PC in step S1202 or step S1204 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a.
The value set in the timer counter T in step S1203 or step S1206 defines the upper limit duration time after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations of different lengths by setting the timer counter T to “85” or “15000” as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long time mode (long time mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec and a short time mode (short period in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that in the long time mode). Mode) and are set.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec, as described above. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and thus the upper limit of 8 game balls. It is easy to make a prize in the special winning opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to win the game ball into the special winning opening 38a. In addition, depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the special winning opening 38a.

Returning to the description of the special winning opening / closing process, the process of step S1105 and thereafter will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the special winning opening opening process of step S1104, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1105. Further, in step S401 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1105 to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is open in step S1101 (processing after step S1106) will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1203 or step S1206 of the special winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1107 and thereafter.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1118 and subsequent steps.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less in step S1106 (processing after step S1107) will be described.
In step S1107, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special winning opening 38a. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the winning in the special winning opening 38a has occurred is performed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the special winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that no winning of the special winning opening 38a has occurred, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that the winning in the special winning opening 38a has occurred, the MPU 62 updates the value of the winning counter PC by subtracting 1 in step S1108.

In step S1109, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1109 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, it ends the special winning opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1109 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in step S1110. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b in the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S1111, the MPU 62 sets a close command. In step S401 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1111 to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38b is set to the closed state based on the close command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1112, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win / fail result is the “special out-of-match result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that the winning / disapproval result is the “special out-of-match result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1123 and subsequent steps described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that the winning / failing result is not the “special out-of-match result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1113 and subsequent steps.
In step S1113, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC and updates it.

In step S1114, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1114 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it sets "500" to the value of the timer counter T in step S1115. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process.

  Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1115 is set to the open waiting state after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again until the open / close door 38b is set to the open state again. It defines the time. In the present embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening waiting time is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode and the progress status.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1114 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1116 and thereafter.
In step S1116, the MPU 62 sets "2000" in the timer counter T as the ending waiting time (waiting period). As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is 4 seconds. The waiting time for ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for ending is the same as the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening / closing execution mode.
Note that the waiting time for ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, for example, to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Also, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different depending on whether the game result is a “low certainty result” or a “most advantageous result” and a game result other than these, etc. The configuration may be made to differ greatly depending on the type.

In step S1117, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. This ending command includes information on whether or not the non-electric accessory 51 is open. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the non-electrical accessory 51 is being opened by determining whether or not the non-electrical accessory opening detection sensor 519 has detected the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51. It is determined and this information is included in the ending command. In step S401 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1117 to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined to be “0” or less by the MPU 62 in step S1106 (processing after step S1118) will be described.
In step S1118, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process as in step S1110 described above.
In step S1119, the MPU 62 sets the close command as in step S1111 described above.

In step S1120, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win / fail result is the “special out-of-match result”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1120 that the winning / discarding result is not the “special out-of-match result”, that is, if the winning / discarding result is “big hit”, the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S1121.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1120 that the winning / disapproval result is the “special out-of-match result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1123 and subsequent steps.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S1120 that the winning / discarding result is not the “special deviation result” (processing after step S1121) will be described.
In step S1121, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC and updates it.

In step S1122, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1122 that the value of the round counter RC is not “0” or less, it executes the processing of step S1115 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1122 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the above-described processing from S1116.

Next, a description will be given of the process (the process after step S1123) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 or step S1120 that the win / fail result is the “special out-of-match result”.
In step S1123, the MPU 62 updates the value of the open / close counter SOC by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1124, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1124 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1115 and thereafter.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1124 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the above-described processing of S1116 and subsequent steps.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition processing, the processing of step S912 and thereafter will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the special winning opening / closing processing of step S911, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the opening / closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S912. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the game state transition processing ends.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S913. It is determined whether or not it is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", the game state transition processing ends.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S914 and then The transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a shift process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1312 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high accuracy result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1302.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1305 and subsequent steps.

First, the processing (processing after step S1302) when the distribution result is determined by the MPU 62 to be the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high accuracy result” in step S1301 will be described.
In step S1302, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high-frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1303, the MPU 62 clears the number-of-times limitation flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limitation flag is not set, the high frequency support mode continues at least until the “big hit” is achieved in the win / loss lottery.

  In step S1304, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. Accordingly, the MPU 62 sets the win / loss lottery mode to the high-probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until the "big win" is reached in the win / loss lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

  When ending the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets a flag (low probability result flag, implicit small round high accuracy result flag, explicit small round high) set in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result. The certainty result flag, the most advantageous result flag), and the special disengagement flag are cleared. In step S801 of the fluctuation start process described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high-probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64 to determine whether or not the winning / winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. There is.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1305) in the case where the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high accuracy result” will be described.
In step S1305, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the “implicit small round high accuracy result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1306.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is not the "implicit small round high accuracy result", the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1308 and the subsequent steps.

First, the processing (processing after step S1306) when the distribution result is determined by the MPU 62 to be the “implicit small round high accuracy result” in step S1305 will be described.
In step S1306, the MPU 62 determines whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1303 and subsequent steps described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1307. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. Accordingly, the MPU 62 sets the win / loss lottery mode to the high-probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until the "big win" is reached in the win / loss lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Next, in step S1305, the processing (processing after step S1308) in the case where the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “unspecified small round high-accuracy result” will be described.
In step S1308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the “low probability result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the distribution result is not the “low probability result” (when it is determined that the winning / disapproving result is the “special deviation result”), the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is ended. To do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the distribution result is the “low probability result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1309 and thereafter.

  In step S1309, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the win / loss lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until the jackpot is won in the win / win lottery and the sorting result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1310, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high-frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1311, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1312, the MPU 62 sets the count limit flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the number-of-times limitation flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter, are played. Continue until the digestion is complete. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been exhausted. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as the power combination support process in step S406 of the normal process, but a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this way, when the win / win lottery results in a “big hit” and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is “most advantageous result” or “explicit small round high-precision result”, the gaming state is the current one. After the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode) ends regardless of the gaming state, the high probability mode is entered and the high frequency support mode is entered. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until the “big hit” is achieved in the win / loss lottery.

  Also, when the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, when the win / win lottery results in a “big hit” and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes “unspecified small round high-accuracy result”, The game state shifts to the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode). The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until the “big hit” is achieved in the win / loss lottery.

  On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, when the win / win lottery results in “big hit” and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes “unspecified small round high accuracy result” In the game state, after the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number defining mode), the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode are continued at least until the "big hit" is reached in the win / loss lottery.

  Also, in the win / no win lottery, when the jackpot is a big win, and when the distribution result is a low probability result in the distribution lottery, the game state is the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the current game state). After the end of the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a “big hit” in the win / loss lot, and the high-frequency support mode does not become a “big hit” in the win / win lottery and is low when 100 game times are exhausted. Switch to frequency support mode.

  In addition, when the "big hit" is not obtained in the win / loss lottery, that is, when the win / loss result is "special miss result" or "normal miss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state is not shifted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process is performed when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode, and then opened / closed when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and any of the holes 533A to 533C. It functions as a specific control starting means for starting the game in the execution mode.

<Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100>
FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 28, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM, a RAM 94, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed, and a volatile storage unit that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits the command resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a program ROM 103, a work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

  The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the voice light emission control device 90, and performs a predetermined calculation process based on the command to control the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply to hold the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 103 is executed, and is volatile that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a storage means.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated for drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads out image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47. The character ROM 106 holds bit map format image data of various designs, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bit map image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display contents of the symbol display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically executes steps S1401 to S1405 (for example, in a 2 msec cycle), as shown in FIG.

  In step S1401, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storing process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading the commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer according to the order of storage in the ring buffer.

In step S1402, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines an effect for game play, an effect for opening / closing execution mode, and the like.
In step S1403, the MPU 92 executes the effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process of step S1402. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

  In step S1404, the MPU 92 executes the demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed without starting a new game time after the game time ends. . Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the various lamp units 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24.

  In step S1405, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process of step S1402 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit the various commands stored as the command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100, and outputs the various commands to the display control device 100. If it is determined that the timing for transmitting to the display control device 100 has arrived, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100. After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes effect determination processing in order to execute an effect for game play, an effect for opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1501 to S1518 as shown in FIG.

In step S1501, the MPU 92 determines whether the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 are received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1501 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S1509 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1501 that each command has been received, in step S1502, the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the result.

  When determining that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" in step S1502, the MPU 92 executes the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S1503. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a “low probability result”, the same even number is finally displayed as a stop result on the activated line L. Information concerning a combination of symbols to be possessed is determined. The odd number and the even number are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the game result is "based on the content of the type command" in step S1504. It is determined whether or not the result is “normal deviation result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1504 that the game result is not the "normal deviation result", that is, the game result is the "special deviation result", the "implicit small round high accuracy result", and the "explicit small round high accuracy result". In either case, in step S1505, common symbol determination processing is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information regarding a special symbol combination as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected in the case of a “normal failure result” in the winning / winning lottery (for example, "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of the special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1504 that the game result is the “normal out-of-range result”, in step S1506, it executes the symbol determination process for normal out. In the symbol removal process for normal disengagement, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the reach display is generated based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display is generated, the MPU 92 determines the information regarding the combination of the symbols of the reach display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. In addition, the combination of the symbols of the reach display is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 displays information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-mentioned combination of symbols as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a symbol having a combination different from any of the symbol combination having the same number, the special symbol combination, and the reach symbol combination by lottery or the like.

  After executing any one of the processes of step S1503, step S1505, and step S1506, the MPU 92 executes effect pattern determination processing in step S1507. In the effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 93 in advance. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the effect content as effect patterns. Note that in step S1507, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to issue a notice display.

  Further, based on the selected effect pattern, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp section 23 and the voice control of the speaker section 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above.

  In step S1508, the MPU 92 sets a variation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S1503, step S1505, and step S1506. Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  From the program ROM 103, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100, based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92, displays a data table for executing the display of the variation display start and stop results on the symbol display device 47. read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 finally displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the activated line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S1508, or when determining in step S1501 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S1509 and subsequent steps.
In step S1509, the MPU 92 executes a round number determination process.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a round number determination process.
In the round number determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1601 to S1612 as shown in FIG.
In step S1601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the non-opening command transmitted from the MPU 62 is received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening time command is received, the MPU 92 executes non-opening time effect determination processing in step S1602. In the non-opening effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the effect corresponding to the non-opening command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

  In step S1603, the MPU 92 sets a non-opening effect command for the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determination process of step S1602. Then, the MPU 92 stores the non-opening effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The non-opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the non-opening effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the non-opening effect.

After executing the process of step S1603, or when determining in step S1601 that the MPU 92 has not received the non-open command, in step S1604, the MPU 92 has received the open command transmitted from the MPU 62. Determine whether or not.
When determining in step S1604 that the MPU 92 has received the opening command, the MPU 92 executes the opening effect determination process in step S1605. In the release effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the effect content corresponding to the release command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

  In step S1606, the MPU 92 sets an opening time effect command related to the opening time effect determined in the opening time effect determination process of step S1605. Then, the MPU 92 stores the release effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This release effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the opening effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect at the time of opening.

After executing the process of step S1606, or when determining that the open command has not been received in step S1604, the MPU 92 receives the 4-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S1607. Determine whether or not.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the 4-round execution command has been received, the MPU 92 executes 4-round execution effect determination processing in step S1608. In the process of determining the 4-round execution effect, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the effect corresponding to the 4-round execution command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

  In step S1609, the MPU 92 sets a 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608. Then, the MPU 92 stores the 4-round execution effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The four-round execution effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the 4-round execution effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the 4-round execution effect.

The MPU 92 receives the 16-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S1610 after executing the process of step S1609 or when determining that the 4-round execution command is not received in step S1607. It is determined whether or not there is.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16-round execution command has been received, the MPU 92 executes 16-round execution effect determination processing in step S1611. In the 16-round execution effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the effect corresponding to the 16-round execution command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

  In step S1612, the MPU 92 sets a 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611. Then, the MPU 92 stores the 16-round execution effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The 16-round execution effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the 16-round execution effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the 16-round execution effect.

  After executing the process of step S1612, or when determining that the 16-round execution command has not been received in step S1610, the MPU 92 ends the round number determination process.

Returning to the description of the effect determination processing, the processing of step S1510 and subsequent steps will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1510, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S1514 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that the opening command has been received, in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

  In step S1512, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1511. In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1511 that the game result is the “special miss result” or the “implicit small round high-precision result”, the MPU 92 uses the opening / closing execution mode. The production A is selected as the production. Further, when the game result is determined to be the “explicit small round high accuracy result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “most advantageous result” and also determines that the number of round games is 4, the effect C1 or effect D1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. To do. In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result" and also determines that the number of round games is 16 times, the effect C2 or the effect D2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. To do. In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “low probability result” and also determines that the number of round games is four times, the MPU 92 selects the effect D1 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “low probability result” and also determines that the number of round games is 16, the effect D2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

The durations of the effects A and B correspond to the time when the special winning opening 38a is opened / closed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the durations of the effects C1 and D1 correspond to the times when the special winning opening 38a is opened / closed four times in a long time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the durations of the effects C2 and D2 correspond to the times when the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 16 times in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode.
In the following description, the effects C1 and C2 are also simply referred to as effects C, and the effects D1 and D2 are also simply referred to as effects D.

  Further, based on the selection result of the effects A to D, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above.

  In step S1513, the MPU 92 sets an open / close execution mode command including information related to the effect for open / close execution mode selected in step S1512. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open / close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S1513, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S1510, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S1514 and subsequent steps.
In step S1514, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S1518 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command is received, in step S1515, the MPU 92 executes the non-electric accessory combination release determination process. In the open determination process of the non-electric accessory, the MPU 92 determines whether the non-electric accessory 51 is open based on the content of the ending command.

  In step S1516, the MPU 92 executes the ending effect determination process corresponding to the state of the non-electric accessory 51 determined in step S1515. In the ending effect determination process, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open (when it is determined to be closed), the non-electrical accessory 51 is opened as the ending effect. Select a normal effect that does not notify the player. On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is open, it selects the opening notice effect that notifies the player of the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 as the ending effect. To do.

  In step S1517, the MPU 92 sets an ending effect command related to the ending effect (normal effect or open notification effect) determined in the ending effect determination process of step S1516. Then, the MPU 92 stores the ending effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The ending effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  Based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the ending effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the ending effect.

  After executing the process of step S1517, or when determining that the ending command has not been received in step S1514, the MPU 92 executes other processes in step S1518. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, the opening command and the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game result and game status>
The relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a relationship between a game result and a game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a relationship between a game result excluding the “normal disengagement result” and a game state or the like. The game results are arranged in the column direction, and the game state or the like is arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 32, the pachinko machine 10, as a game result excluding the "normal out-of-range result", wins / losses of "big hit prize" and "special out-of-range result", "unspecified small round high-precision result", and "explicit" It has a small round high accuracy result, a "most favorable result", and a "low accuracy result".

Here, as shown in the second column of Table of FIG. 32, the “special miss result” is a game result selected when the “big hit” is not obtained in the winning / winning lottery (symbol x in the drawing). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when the “big hit” is achieved in the win / loss lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the "normal disengagement result" and the game state will be described. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state and the like, the content of the game result, and The content such as the game state is arbitrary.

In the "special disengagement result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and the special winning opening 38a is opened / closed twice in a short time mode. Further, in the "special miss result", the win / no win lottery mode is not shifted.
In the "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is performed with the upper limit number of times being two times, and opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. To be done. Further, in the “non-explicit small round high accuracy result”, the win / loss lot mode is shifted to the high probability mode.
As described above, the “extra outcome result” and the “unspecified small round high-precision result” are different in the types of the opening / closing execution modes, but common in that the special winning opening 38a is opened / closed twice in a short time mode. is doing.

  Further, in the "special disengagement result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect A. Furthermore, the support mode does not shift in the "extra outlier result" and the "implicit small round high accuracy result". Further, in the game time after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G.

Therefore, the player does not know whether the game result is the “special miss result” or the “unspecified small round high-precision result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Can not. In other words, the symbol display device 47, in the game times after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, wins / fails lottery even when the result of the “unspecified small round high-precision result” in the sorting lottery becomes the high probability mode. The mode is disguised as if it has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning / winning lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with the upper limit of two times, and opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. It Further, in the “explicit small round high accuracy result”, the winning / winning lottery mode is shifted to the high probability mode. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect B. Further, in the “explicit small round high-precision result”, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game time after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can recognize that the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with an upper limit number of 4 times or 16 times, and opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is performed for a long time. Aspects are performed 4 or 16 times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode for the opening / closing execution mode. The effect is the effect C or effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect C, and the combination of symbols having the same even number of stop results. In this case, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect D.
Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning / winning lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "most favorable result" and the "low probability result", the support mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode.

  Therefore, if the player has a combination of symbols having the same odd number as the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect C, the game result is the “most advantageous result”. Can be grasped. However, if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and the game result is the "most advantageous result". It is not possible to grasp which is the “low probability result” or “low probability result”.

  Then, in the game time after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not do.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating the high-probability mode on the display screen G, and in the high-frequency support mode, the game number is the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). When the number of times is reached, an image for notifying the shift to the low frequency support mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, even in the case where the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 47 finally produces the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in the game time after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If so, the game result is disguised as if it was a "low probability result".

  Then, when the distribution result is the “most advantageous result”, the symbol display device 47 is in the high probability mode after the 100 game times have been exhausted without becoming the “big hit” in the win / loss lottery. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage applied as if the game result was a “low probability result”.

<Flow when switching to the open / close execution mode>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right-side variable ball entry mechanism in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that, in FIG. 33, the non-electric accessory 51 is simplified and illustrated at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 33A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. 33 (B) and 33 (C) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. FIGS. 33D and 33E are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 33 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G in the case where the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When shifting to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 33 (A) and displays it on the display screen of the symbol display device 47. It is arranged at the lower left position of G, and the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the open / close execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-open command is received, and therefore, in step S1602, when the non-open command is performed. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1603, the non-opening time production command related to the non-opening time effect determined in the non-opening time effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the player to hit the right side by displaying the angel's dialogue "Aim for the crune by hitting the right!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route (see arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the open state, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. To enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the clean route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

  When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the four-round execution command has been received, and thus, in step S1608, the four-round execution effect. Is executed, and in step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command relating to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “4R confirmed! Right hit!” In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, Inform the player that he will start playing four rounds.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open, and thus the non-electrical accessory 51 is used as the ending effect. Select the normal effect that does not notify the player of the release of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 33, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 33 (C). The player is informed of the shift to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16 round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16 round execution effect command relating to the 16 round execution effect determined in the 16 round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 (D), the MPU 102 displays the angel's dialogue “16R confirmed! Right hit!” In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, Inform the player that he will start executing 16 round games. In addition, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the clune 53 and drops downward, and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535, shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, so selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When a ball enters the hole 533A (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is open, and thus the ending effect of the non-electrical accessory 51 is determined. Select the release notification effect that notifies the player of the release. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 33, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 33 (E), the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed of the shift to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in. After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's dialogue “Next jackpot is left-handed 16R confirmed!” In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the opening / closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is opened. Note that, in FIG. 34, the non-electric accessory 51 is simplified and illustrated at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 34A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. 34B and 34C are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51.

When the opening / closing execution mode is entered at the time of opening the non-electric accessory 51, the MPU 102 displays each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a reduced display as shown in FIG. It is arranged at the lower left position of, and the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the open / close execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the opening command is received, and thus in step S1605, the opening effect is determined. The processing is executed, and in step S1606, the command for opening time effect related to the opening time effect determined in the opening time effect determination process of step S1605 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the opening time effect based on the opening time effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 suggests that the player left-hands by displaying the angel's line “16R confirmed by left-handing!” Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. .

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route (see arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the open state, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. To enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the clean route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.
When a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the pachinko machine 10 executes the same process as when the non-electric accessory 51 is in the open / closed execution mode when not opened.

  When a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16 round execution command has been received, so in step S1611, 16 round execution is performed. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “16R confirmed! Right hit!” In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, Inform the player that he will start executing 16 round games. In addition, the game ball that has entered the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the open state to the closed state.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 34, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L, so that the MPU 92 It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, so selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, and thus the non-electric accessory is used as the ending effect. A normal effect that does not notify the player of the opening of 51 is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 34, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 34 (C). The player is informed of the shift to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in.

Here, in the present embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering part) and a lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering part).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 easily causes a game ball to enter the upper working opening 36 and does not easily enter a game ball into the lower working opening 37. A right-handed route (second route) is provided in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operation port 37 and which does not easily cause the game ball to enter the upper operation port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-hand route.

Further, the main controller 60, in the low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of entering the lower working port 37 is lower than in the upper working port 36, and in the lower working port 37 from the upper working port 36. It has a high frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after ending the game in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the game result is the "explicit small round high accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until "big hit" in the win / loss lottery. . Further, when the game result is the “low probability result”, the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), and then, from the high frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

  Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high-accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the player becomes "a big hit" at least in the win / loss lot after finishing the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Up to, the game times can be executed by inserting the game balls into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electrical accessory 51 at least until the “big hit” in the win / win lottery.

  On the other hand, when the game result is a "low probability result", the player finishes the game in the opening / closing execution mode and then executes 100 game times (from the high frequency support mode). The game times can be executed by inserting the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route (until the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball by entering the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player sets the open / close execution mode to the open / close execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played with the expectation of shifting.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is not limited and a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is limited to 100 to set a gaming state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game. Although the state has been created, a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game state may be produced by setting a game state other than these. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. .

Here, when the opening / closing execution mode is entered when the non-electrical accessory 51 is opened, the player causes the clune 53 to enter the holes 533A to 533C or enters the non-electrical accessory 51. You can choose whether to generate a sphere.
Therefore, for example, the player shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, and if the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result”, the clune 53 By aiming to enter the 16-round execution gate or the 4-round execution gate, the high-probability mode can be continued while maintaining the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. After that, the player shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electrical accessory 51 is opened, and when the game result is a "low probability result", by aiming to enter the non-electrical accessory 51, Since the non-electric accessory 51 can be shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player executes 100 game times after shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. By the time, if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, it is possible to avoid the situation where the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the opening / closing entrance means is changed from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of one game ball, but from the open state based on the entry of two or more game balls. You may move to a closed state.
When the opening / closing ball means is configured in this way, for example, the player keeps the opening / closing ball means in the open state even after the first game ball is inserted into the opening / closing ball means. Since it is possible, it is possible to diversify the order of aiming at the round game execution gate. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can further expand the options of the player and further improve the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment as described above, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 makes it possible to enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the game ball entering the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Since the clune 53 is provided and the clune 53 is provided with the respective holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode when entering the game ball, the player controls the main controller 60 to open / close the playing state. After shifting to, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by inserting a game ball into each of the holes 533A to 533C. Further, the hole 533A shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so that the player shifts the game state to the next opening / closing execution mode by the main controller 60. After that, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The opening / closing execution mode game started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is more open and closed than the opening execution mode game when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when the game in the opening / closing execution mode is started by inserting the game ball into the clune 53. . Further, when the non-electric accessory 51 is moved from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the hole 533A, the player performs the opening / closing of the game state in the main controller 60 next time. After shifting to the mode, by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, the player is given a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It is possible to start the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of the game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 51 and the game ball into the hole 533A can be started. From the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C by starting the opening / closing execution mode game in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Since a high value is also given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The game state transition process is an opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening / closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a number larger than a predetermined number when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of game balls is set to be larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball is paid out is started, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the gaming ball that has entered the clune 53. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(6) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-shaped body 513, and the closed state by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Since it shifts from the open state to the open state, it is possible to shift the open / closed state by using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(7) After finishing the game in the opening / closing execution mode, the player goes down through the right-handed route until he / she executes 100 game times (until the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). By inserting a game ball into the operating port 37, it is possible to execute a game time. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball by entering the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player sets the open / close execution mode to the open / close execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played with the expectation of shifting.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 35 is a front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with the clune 53 provided on the left side area of the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52, enters the hole 533A of the clune 53, and falls downward to form the communication passage 535. The game ball guided to the non-electrical accessory 51 via the non-electrical accessory 51 has transitioned from the closed state to the open state. In other words, in the first embodiment, the game ball that has entered the hole 533A of the clune 53 is always guided to the non-electric accessory 51.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with the clune 53A provided in the left side region of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the gaming ball entered in the hole 533A of the clune 53A is not necessarily electrically driven. This is different from the first embodiment in that it is not guided by the accessory 51.

FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view in which the vicinity of the klune is enlarged and seen from an obliquely upper side.
As shown in FIG. 36, the clune 53A is provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 531 and the disk-shaped rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball guided by the clune 53A via the guide rail 525. A side wall 532, a cylindrical rotating body 537 disposed below the rolling surface 531 and rotatably provided around the central axis, and a saucer 538 disposed below the rotating body 537 are provided. There is.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 531 and is formed at three holes 533A to 533C formed at equal intervals with each other and at the center of the holes 533A to 533A. It is provided with a protrusion 534 having three side surfaces that are inclined so as to descend toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 532 side toward the holes 533A to 533C side (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the clune 53A via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C (FIG. (See middle arrow A).

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C includes detection sensors 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) that detect the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensors 40i to 40k are arranged on the back surface side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects the entry into the hole 533C. Detects the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when the balls enter the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when the balls enter the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C is an opportunity to start a round game when winning the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery and transitioning to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after entering the opening / closing execution mode, if a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening / closing door 38b. Is set to an open state, and execution of a round game of a predetermined number of times is started.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game 16 times when the ball enters the hole 533A, and thus starts executing the round game 16 times in the hole 533A. A mark is displayed around the hole 533A so as to suggest that.
Further, the pachinko machine 10 starts the execution of the four round games when the ball enters the holes 533B and 533C, so the execution of the four round games is started in the holes 533B and 533C. The mark is not shown to suggest that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the clune 53A determines the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. It functions as a variable entry means that allows entry.
Further, the clune 53A is provided with holes 533A to 533C (plurality of ball entry portions) into which the game balls entered into the clune 53A are entered. This clune 53A has a rolling surface 531 for rolling a game ball that has entered the clune 53A, and a plurality of ball-in portions are provided on the rolling surface 531 and a game in which the rolling surface 531 rolls. Enter the ball. Specifically, the rolling surface 531 is formed with a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 531 and includes a plurality of ball-in portions provided at equal intervals.

In addition, in this embodiment, the some ball-in part was provided in the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53A, and the game ball which rolls the rolling surface 531 was ball-in. On the other hand, the plurality of ball entrance portions may be provided in, for example, a distribution mechanism that distributes the game balls entered into the variable ball entrance means to any of the plurality of ball entrance portions. In this case, the distribution mechanism may distribute the game balls to any of the plurality of ball-in units, which may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball entrance means only needs to include a plurality of ball entrances.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable ball entrance means includes a plurality of ball entrance parts, but the variable ball entrance means may include a single ball entrance part.

  Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A (second ball entry portion) are 16 round execution gates for starting execution of 16 round games. Each hole 533B, 533C (first ball entry portion) is a four-round execution gate that starts execution of four round games. Therefore, the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Value is given to the player.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets a predetermined number (four times in the present embodiment) of the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 at the time of entering a game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C, so that a predetermined number of times is set. The game is started in the open / close execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out, and when the game balls enter the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed is greater than a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, a number of times). (16 times), the game is started in the open / close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is set by setting the number of times of opening / closing the variable winning device 38, and thus each hole 533B, 533C. Although a higher value is given to the player than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball is entered, the holes 533B and 533C are set by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, for example. A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball is entered. In short, the open / close execution mode and the game in the open / close execution mode started when the game ball enters the second entrance section are the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first entrance section. It suffices to give the player a higher value than the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate for starting execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games, and each hole is The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between each of the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate may not be fixed. For example, the correspondence may be changed based on the result of the internal lottery. May be. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can extend the playability and can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

The rotating body 537 is formed in a circular shape on the upper surface thereof, and upper openings 537A1 to 537A3 formed at positions corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C, and a circular shape on the lower surface thereof, and the upper opening 537A1. To 537A3, lower openings 537B1 to 537B3 are provided.
The lower opening 537B1 is opened so as to be concentric with the central axis of the rotating body 537. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game balls that enter the holes 533A to 533C and fall downward, and enter the upper opening 537A1 are the rotating bodies formed inside the rotating body 537. It will be discharged from the lower opening 537B1 through the passage 537C1 (see arrow B1 in the figure).

The lower opening 537B2 opens directly below the upper opening 537A2. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game balls that enter the holes 533A to 533C and fall downward, and enter the upper opening 537A2 are the rotating bodies formed inside the rotating body 537. It will be discharged from the lower opening 537B2 through the passage 537C2 (see arrow B2 in the figure).
The lower opening 537B3 opens directly below the upper opening 537A3. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game balls that enter the holes 533A to 533C and fall downward, and enter the upper opening 537A3 are the rotating bodies formed inside the rotating body 537. It will be discharged from the lower opening 537B3 through the passage 537C3 (see arrow B3 in the figure).

The saucer 538 has a disk-shaped rolling surface 538A for rolling the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 and dropped downward, and a side wall 538B provided along the peripheral edge of the rolling surface 538A. I have it.
The rolling surface 538A includes a cylindrical tubular portion 538A1 formed concentrically at the center position thereof. This tubular portion 538A1 guides the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B1 to the communication passage 538C. This communication passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51 similarly to the communication passage 535 in the first embodiment (see arrow C in the figure).
The side wall 538B has a rectangular opening 538B1 formed laterally. The opening 538B1 guides the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 to the discharge passage 538D. The discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball into the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35), like the discharge passage 536 in the first embodiment.

Here, the rolling surface 538A is inclined so as to descend toward the opening 538B1 side.
Therefore, the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 is guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 after rolling on the rolling surface 538A (see arrow D in the figure). .

Further, the rotating body 537 is formed on the lower surface of the rotating body 537 and has a circular groove portion 537D formed so as to be concentric with the central axis of the rotating body 537, and a gear (not shown) formed on the peripheral surface thereof. And a rotary body drive unit 537E (see FIG. 37) that rotates the rotary body 537 via the gear.
The groove portion 537D is fitted with the side wall 538B of the receiving tray 538 to place the rotating body 537 on the receiving tray 538 and position the rotating body 537 with respect to the receiving tray 538.
The rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed, but the rotation speed may be changed.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 performs a payout control device 70 that executes the payout control that causes the payout device 71 to pay out the game balls, and a power supply that executes the discharge control that causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to shoot the game balls. And a firing control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game control (main control), and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. This substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace upon its opening, or may have a trace structure for leaving a trace upon its opening. Specifically, as the trace means, a board box is configured by joining a plurality of case bodies, and a joining portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating the case bodies is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace that the adhesive layer has been peeled off because it remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 forming the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be configured into individual chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply to hold the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described later in detail.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed, and is a volatile storage unit that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, holding ball storage areas 64b, and electric-worker holding areas 64c. These areas will be described later in detail.

  The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60, the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, and the non-electric accessory release detection sensor 519. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. The output port of the MPU 62 is an electric accessory driving unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower working opening 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. Rotation for rotating the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a blade member driving unit 521c that opens and closes the 521a, a plate driving unit 523c that opens and closes the plate 523a, and a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537. It is connected to the body drive unit 537E, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46.

  The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric role object driving unit 37b to open and close the electric role object 37a. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the special winning opening 38a. Further, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the blade member drive unit 521c to open and close the blade member 521a. In the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the plate drive unit 523c to open / close the plate 523a. Further, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the rotating body driving unit 537E to rotate the rotating body 537. In addition, in each game, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 to display the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the operation openings 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 to display the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

<Flow when switching to the open / close execution mode>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the opening / closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that, in FIG. 38, the non-electric accessory 51 is simplified and illustrated at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. 38 (B) and 38 (C) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 that has not been opened after the entry into the 4-round execution gate has occurred. FIGS. 38D and 38E are views showing the non-electric accessory 51 that is in the open state after the entry into the 4-round execution gate occurs. FIG. 38 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G in the case where the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the opening / closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 38 (A), and the display screen of the symbol display device 47. It is arranged at the lower left position of G, and the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the open / close execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-open command is received, and therefore, in step S1602, when the non-open command is performed. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1603, the non-opening time production command related to the non-opening time effect determined in the non-opening time effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the player to hit the right side by displaying the angel's dialogue "Aim for the crune by hitting the right!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route (see arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the open state, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. To enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the clean route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

  When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the four-round execution command has been received, and thus, in step S1608, the four-round execution effect. Is executed, and in step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command relating to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102, as shown in FIGS. 38 (B) and 38 (D), the angel's dialogue “4R confirmed! Right hit!” In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By displaying, the player is informed that the execution of four round games will be started.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

FIG. 39 is a perspective view showing a flow in which the game balls are guided to the discharge passage after the balls have entered the four-round execution gate.
When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (four-round execution gate), the game ball passes through one of the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotor 537 and falls into the saucer 538. .
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG.

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via the gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is The rotor 537 communicates with any one of the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and then stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C2, the gaming ball is as shown in FIG. 39 (B). After rolling on the rolling surface 538A of the tray 538, it is guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 (see the arrow in the figure). The discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 38, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L, so that the MPU 92 It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 538D, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open, and thus the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 is played as the ending effect. Choose a normal production that is not announced to the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 38, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 38 (C). The player is informed of the shift to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in.

FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to the communication passage after a ball has entered the 4-round execution gate.
Further, for example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG.

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via the gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is The rotor 537 communicates with any one of the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and then stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C1, the gaming ball is as shown in FIG. 40 (B). It is guided to the communication passage 538C via the tubular portion 538A1 (see the arrow in the figure). The communication passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. Then, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 538C causes the non-electric accessory 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state.

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 38, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L, so that the MPU 92 It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrical accessory 51 through the communication passage 538C, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is open, so the non-electric accessory 51 is used as the ending effect. Select the release notification effect that notifies the player of the release of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 38, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 38 (E), the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed of the shift to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in. After that, the MPU 102 displays, as shown in FIG. 38 (F), the angel's dialogue "Next jackpot is left-handed 16R confirmed!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops. Then, the game ball waits without entering the holes 533A to 533C until the holes 533A to 533C and the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537 communicate with each other. In other words, the game ball does not enter until the holes 533A to 533C and the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotor 537 communicate with each other.

Here, when the opening / closing execution mode is entered when the non-electrical accessory 51 is opened, the player causes the clune 53 to enter the holes 533A to 533C or enters the non-electrical accessory 51. You can choose whether to generate a sphere.
Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, for example, the player can first aim for the clune 53 to enter the 16-round execution gate, resulting in 16 rounds. If the player waits for a ball to enter the four-round execution gate instead of the execution gate, he / she can further aim to enter the non-electric accessory 51. Then, in the case where a ball entering the non-electric accessory 51 can be generated while waiting for the ball to enter the 4-round execution gate of the clune 53, execution of 16 round games can be started. . According to this, the player can switch which round game execution gate is aimed at according to the situation, and it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device, a non-electric accessory, and a right variable ball entry mechanism in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. 41, the non-electric accessory 51 is simplified and illustrated at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 41 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. 41 (B) and 41 (C) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 that has not been opened after the ball enters the 16-round execution gate. 41D and 41E are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 that is in an open state after a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 41 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G in the case of selecting an opening notification effect that notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 as the ending effect.

When the opening / closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 41 (A) and displays the symbol on the display screen of the symbol display device 47. It is arranged at the lower left position of G and the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the open / close execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-open command is received, and therefore, in step S1602, when the non-open command is performed. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1603, the non-opening time production command related to the non-opening time effect determined in the non-opening time effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the player to hit the right side by displaying the angel's dialogue "Aim for the crune by hitting the right!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route (see arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the open state, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. To enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the clean route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

  When a ball enters the hole 533A (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the 16-round execution command is received in step S1610. Therefore, in step S1611, the 16-round execution effect is determined. The process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round execution effect command relating to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102, as shown in FIGS. 41 (B) and 41 (D), the angel's dialogue “16R confirmed! Right hit!” In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By displaying, the player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will be started.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

FIG. 42 is a perspective view showing a flow in which the game balls are guided to the discharge passage after the balls enter the 16-round execution gate.
When the ball enters the hole 533A (16-round execution gate), the game ball passes through any of the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotor 537 and falls into the saucer 538.
When the ball enters the hole 533A, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 42 (A).

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via the gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is The rotor 537 communicates with any one of the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533A, comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and then stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C2, the gaming ball is as shown in FIG. 42 (B). After rolling on the rolling surface 538A of the tray 538, it is guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 (see the arrow in the figure). The discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. Note that, in the example of FIG. 41, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, so selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 538D, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open, and thus the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 is played as the ending effect. Choose a normal production that is not announced to the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 41, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 41 (C), has the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed of the shift to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in.

FIG. 43 is a perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to the communication passage after a ball enters the 16-round execution gate.
When a ball enters the hole 533A, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 43 (A).

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via the gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533A is The rotor 537 communicates with any one of the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533A, comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and then stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C1, the game ball is, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), It is guided to the communication passage 538C via the tubular portion 538A1 (see the arrow in the figure). The communication passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. Then, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 538C causes the non-electric accessory 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state.

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the present embodiment, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L, so the MPU 92: It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, so selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrical accessory 51 through the communication passage 538C, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is open, so the non-electric accessory 51 is used as the ending effect. Select the release notification effect that notifies the player of the release of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 41, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 41 (E), the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed of the shift to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (F), the MPU 102 displays an angel's dialogue "Next jackpot is left-handed 16R confirmed!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the rotating body 537 rotates about an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface 531 as a central axis, and inserts the game balls into the holes 533A to 533C. Further, the rotating body 537 is formed at a position corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C, and is provided with a plurality of rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 for guiding the game balls entered in the holes 533A to 533C. . Then, the plurality of rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 are the rotating body passage 537C2 and the rotating body passage 537C3 (the first rotating body passageway) that do not shift the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. ) And a rotating body passage 537C1 (second rotating body passage) for shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. Therefore, the rotating body 537 and the saucer 538 function as an open / close lottery means for performing a lottery on the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of the game balls into the holes 533A to 533C.

  In the present embodiment, the rotating body 537 and the saucer 538 are adopted as the open / close lottery means. A lottery using may be adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing lottery means draws whether or not the opening / closing entrance means is shifted from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance portion. You may make a lottery whether or not to shift the ball means from the disadvantageous state where it is easy to close to the advantageous state where it is easy to open. In short, the open / close lottery means may be any kind of lottery as long as it can execute the lottery on the open / close entrance means based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance portion.

Here, in the present embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering part) and a lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering part).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 easily causes a game ball to enter the upper working opening 36 and does not easily enter a game ball into the lower working opening 37. A right-handed route (second route) is provided in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operation port 37 and which does not easily cause the game ball to enter the upper operation port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-hand route.

Further, the main controller 60, in the low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of entering the lower working port 37 is lower than in the upper working port 36, and in the lower working port 37 from the upper working port 36. It has a high frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after ending the game in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the game result is the "explicit small round high accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until "big hit" in the win / loss lottery. . Further, when the game result is the “low probability result”, the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), and then, from the high frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

  Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high-accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the player becomes "a big hit" at least in the win / loss lot after finishing the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Up to, the game times can be executed by inserting the game balls into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electrical accessory 51 at least until the “big hit” in the win / win lottery.

  On the other hand, when the game result is a "low probability result", the player finishes the game in the opening / closing execution mode and then executes 100 game times (from the high frequency support mode). The game times can be executed by inserting the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route (until the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball by entering the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player sets the open / close execution mode to the open / close execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played with the expectation of shifting.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is not limited and a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is limited to 100 to set a gaming state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game. Although the state has been created, a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game state may be produced by setting a game state other than these. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. .

According to this embodiment as described above, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 makes it possible to enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the game ball entering the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Since the clune 53A is provided, and the clune 53A is provided with the holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball is entered, the player controls the main controller 60 to open / close the playing state. After shifting to, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by inserting a game ball into each of the holes 533A to 533C. Further, since the clune 53A is provided with the rotating body 537 and the saucer 538 that perform the lottery for the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of the game balls into the holes 533A to 533C, for example, the rotating body 537 and the saucer 538, for example. When the non-electric accessory 51 is moved from the closed state to the open state by winning the lottery executed in, the player shifts the game state to the next opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 60. After that, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The opening / closing execution mode game started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is more open and closed than the opening execution mode game when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode by inserting the game ball into the clune 53A. . When the lottery executed by the rotating body 537 is won and the non-electric accessory 51 is moved from the closed state to the open state, the player controls the main controller 60 to change the game state to the next state. After shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, the player has a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It is possible to start the game of the open / close execution mode given to. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of the game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 51 and the game ball into the hole 533A can be started. From the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C by starting the opening / closing execution mode game in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Since a high value is also given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The game state transition process is an opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening / closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a number larger than a predetermined number when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of game balls is set to be larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball is paid out is started, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53A, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the gaming ball that has entered the clune 53A. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) The opening / closing lottery means includes a rotating body 537 that rotates around an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface 531 as a central axis and that receives a game ball that has entered each of the holes 533A to 533C. Rotating body passages 537C2 and 537C3 that do not shift the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. And a rotating body passage 537C1 to be transferred. According to this, the opening / closing lottery means independently closes the non-electric accessory 51 without being affected by the clune 53A having the holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode when entering the game ball. It is possible to perform a lottery as to whether or not to shift from the state to the open state. In addition, when the non-electric accessory 51 is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game balls entered into the holes 533A to 533C into the rotating body passage 537C1 of the rotating body 537, the game is executed. When the player enters the game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 after shifting the game state to the next opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 60. It is possible to start the game in the open / close execution mode, which gives the player a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode to be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-shaped body 513, and the closed state by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Since it shifts from the open state to the open state, it is possible to shift the open / closed state using only the weight of the game ball without needing other power such as electric power.

(8) After finishing the game in the opening / closing execution mode, the player goes down through the right-handed route until he / she executes 100 game times (until the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). By inserting a game ball into the operating port 37, it is possible to execute a game time. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball by entering the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player sets the open / close execution mode to the open / close execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played with the expectation of shifting.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with the clune 53 provided on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate) of the clune 53 to drop downward. However, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 has shifted the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. In other words, in the first embodiment, the game ball that entered the 16-round execution gate was always guided to the non-electric accessory 51.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with the clune 53B provided in the area on the left side of the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the gaming ball that entered the 16 round execution gate of the clune 53B is not necessarily This is different from the first embodiment in that it is not guided by the non-electric accessory 51.

FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view in which the vicinity of the klune is enlarged and seen from an obliquely upper side.
As shown in FIG. 45, the clune 53B includes a first clune 55 connected to the guide rail 525, and a second clune 56 arranged below the first clune 55.
The first klune 55 has a disk-shaped rolling surface 551 for rolling the game ball guided by the first klune 55 via the guide rail 525, and a side wall 552 provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 551. Is equipped with.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552.

The rolling surface 551 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 551, and is formed with two holes 553A, 553B formed at equal intervals and at the center of the holes 553A, And a protrusion 554 having two side surfaces that are inclined so as to descend toward the 553B side. Further, the rolling surface 551 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 552 side toward the holes 553A and 553B side.
Therefore, the game ball guided to the first klune 55 through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552 and then enters one of the holes 553A and 553B. (See arrow A in the figure).

  Each hole 553A, 553B is provided with detection sensors 40i, 40j (see FIG. 114) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and these detection sensors 40i, 40j are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 553A, and the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 553B. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when the balls enter the holes 553A and 553B, unlike when the balls enter the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i, 40j may be of any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 553A, so the hole 553A functions as a 16-round execution gate. Further, since the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 553B, the hole 553B functions as a 4-round execution gate. In the present embodiment, the detection sensor 40k is different from the first embodiment in that it is not used.

  Each hole 553A, 553B is an opportunity to start a round game when winning the shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery and shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after entering the opening / closing execution mode, if a ball enters each of the holes 553A and 553B, the opening / closing door 38b. Is set to an open state, and execution of a round game a predetermined number of times is started.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game 16 times when the ball enters the hole 553A, and thus starts executing the round game 16 times in the hole 553A. A mark is displayed around the hole 553A to suggest that.
Also, since the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game four times when the ball enters the hole 553B, it suggests that the hole 553B starts executing the round game four times. You haven't displayed the mark as you would.

  In addition, the first clune 55 has a guide rail 555A that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 553A to the second clune 56, and a guide rail 555B that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 553B to the second clune 56. I have it.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the first clune 55 is a game that flows down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37. It functions as a variable ball entry means that allows balls to enter.
In addition, the first clune 55 is provided with holes 553A and 553B (plurality of ball entry portions) into which the game balls entered in the first clune 55 are entered. The first clune 55 has a rolling surface 551 that rolls the game ball that has entered the first clune 55, and a plurality of ball-in portions are provided on the rolling surface 551 and the rolling surface 551. Inject a rolling game ball. Specifically, the rolling surface 551 is formed with a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 551, and includes a plurality of ball-in portions provided at equal intervals.

In addition, in this embodiment, the some ball-in part was provided in the rolling surface 551 of the 1st clune 55, and the game ball which rolls the rolling surface 551 was ball-in. On the other hand, the plurality of ball entrance portions may be provided in, for example, a distribution mechanism that distributes the game balls entered into the variable ball entrance means to any of the plurality of ball entrance portions. In this case, the distribution mechanism may distribute the game balls to any of the plurality of ball-in units, which may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball entrance means only needs to include a plurality of ball entrances.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable ball entrance means includes a plurality of ball entrance parts, but the variable ball entrance means may include a single ball entrance part.

  Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A (second ball entry portion) are 16 round execution gates for starting execution of 16 round games. Further, the hole 553B (first ball entry portion) is a four-round execution gate that starts execution of four round games. Therefore, the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A has a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. Is given to the person.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets a predetermined number of game balls by setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number (four times in this embodiment) when the game ball enters the hole 553B. The game in the open / close execution mode that can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 is larger than a predetermined number (16 times in the present embodiment) when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A. By setting to, the game is started in the open / close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, the game in the opening / closing execution mode, which is started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A, is set in the hole 553B by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed. Although a higher value is given to the player than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started at the time of entering a ball, for example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38 or the like, the game ball is inserted into the hole 553B. The player may be given a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which starts at the time of the ball. In short, the open / close execution mode and the game in the open / close execution mode started when the game ball enters the second entrance section are the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first entrance section. It suffices to give the player a higher value than the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hole 553A is a 16-round execution gate for starting execution of 16 round games, the hole 553B is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games, and each hole 553A, 553B. The correspondence between the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 553A and 553B and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate may not be fixed. For example, the correspondence may be changed based on the result of the internal lottery. May be. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can extend the playability and can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

The second clune 56 is provided along the periphery of the disc-shaped rolling surface 561 for rolling the game ball guided by the second clune 56 via the guide rails 555A and 555B, and the periphery of the rolling surface 561. And a side wall 562.
The guide rails 555A and 555B guide the game balls to the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562.

The rolling surface 561 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 561, and three holes 563A to 563C are formed at equal intervals to each other, and are formed at the center of each of the holes 563A to 563A. And a protrusion 564 having three side surfaces that are inclined so as to descend toward the 563C side. The rolling surface 561 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 562 side toward the holes 563A to 563C side.
Therefore, the game ball guided to the second clune 56 via the guide rails 555A and 555B rolls on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562 and then enters any of the holes 563A to 563C. (See arrow B in the figure).

  The second clune 56 is connected to a hole 563A formed on the front surface side (front side in the drawing) of the game board 31, and enters the hole 563A downward as shown by an arrow C in the drawing. A connecting passage 565 for guiding the dropped game ball to the non-electric accessory 51 and two holes 563B and 563C formed on the back side (back side in the drawing) of the game board 31 and connected with the arrow D in the drawing. As shown in, a discharge passage 566 is provided to discharge the game ball, which has entered the holes 563B and 563C and dropped downward, to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 44).

Since the communication passage 565 guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51 like the communication passage 535 in the first embodiment, it is suggested that the hole 563A guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. Thus, a mark is displayed around the hole 563A.
The discharge passage 566 discharges the game ball to the game area similarly to the discharge passage 536 in the first embodiment, and therefore the holes 563B and 563C indicate the hole 563B to discharge the game ball to the game area. , No mark is displayed around 563C.

<Flow when switching to the open / close execution mode>
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the opening / closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that, in FIG. 46, the non-electric accessory 51 is simplified and illustrated at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 46 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. 46 (B) and (C) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 that has not been opened after the ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. FIGS. 46D and 46E are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 that is in an open state after a ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. FIG. 46 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G in the case where the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the opening / closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 46 (A) to display the symbol display device 47. It is arranged at the lower left position of G, and the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the open / close execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-open command is received, and therefore, in step S1602, when the non-open command is performed. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1603, the non-opening time production command related to the non-opening time effect determined in the non-opening time effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the player to hit the right side by displaying the angel's dialogue "Aim for the crune by hitting the right!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route (see arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the open state, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. To enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the clean route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the first clune 55 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the first tune 55 of the tune 53B via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552, and then enters one of the holes 553A and 553B. It will be.

FIG. 47 is a top view of the clune when a ball enters the 4-round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A) is a top view of the first clune 55, and FIGS. 47 (B) and 47 (C) are top views of the second clune 56.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 47 (A), when a ball enters the hole 553B (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 has received the four-round execution command in step S1607. Since it is determined, in step S1608, the 4-round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1609, the 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is executed. Set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102, as shown in FIGS. 46 (B) and 46 (D), the angel's dialogue “4R confirmed! Right hit!” In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By displaying, the player is informed that the execution of four round games will be started.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

When a ball enters the hole 553B (four-round execution gate), the game ball is guided to the second clune 56 via the guide rail 555B. This game ball, after rolling on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562, will enter any of the holes 563A to 563C.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 47 (B), when the ball enters the holes 563B and 563C, the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566.

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 46, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open, and thus the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 is played as the ending effect. Choose a normal production that is not announced to the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 46, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in.

  Further, for example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 47 (C), when a ball enters the hole 563A, the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 565. After that, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 565 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 46, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrical accessory 51 through the communication passage 565, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is open, so the non-electric accessory 51 is used as the ending effect. Select the release notification effect that notifies the player of the release of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 46, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. The player is informed of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in. After that, the MPU 102 displays, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), the angel's dialogue "Next jackpot is left-handed 16R confirmed!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the open / close execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that FIG. 48 illustrates the non-electric accessory 51 in a simplified manner at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of shifting to the open / close execution mode. 48 (B) and 48 (C) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 that has not been opened after the ball enters the 16-round execution gate. FIGS. 48 (D) and 48 (E) are views showing the non-electric accessory 51 that is in an open state after a ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 48 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G in the case where an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. It is arranged at the lower left position of G and the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the open / close execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-open command is received, and therefore, in step S1602, when the non-open command is performed. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1603, the non-opening time production command related to the non-opening time effect determined in the non-opening time effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the player to hit the right side by displaying the angel's dialogue "Aim for the crune by hitting the right!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route (see arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the open state, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. To enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the clean route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the first tune 55 of the tune 53B via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552, and then enters one of the holes 553A and 553B. It will be.

FIG. 49 is a top view of the clune when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 49A is a top view of the first clune 55, and FIGS. 49B and 49C are top views of the second clune 56.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49 (A), when a ball enters the hole 553A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 receives the 16 round execution command in step S1610. Since it is determined, the 16-round execution effect determination process is executed in step S1611, and the 16-round execution effect command relating to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is executed in step S1612. Set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 48 (B) and FIG. 48 (D), the angel's dialogue “16R confirmed! Right hit!” In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By displaying, the player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will be started.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

When a ball enters the hole 553A (16-round execution gate), the game ball is guided to the second clune 56 via the guide rail 555A. This game ball, after rolling on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562, will enter any of the holes 563A to 563C.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49 (B), when the ball enters the holes 563B and 563C, the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566.

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 48, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, so selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open, and thus the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 is played as the ending effect. Choose a normal production that is not announced to the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 48, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 48 (C). The player is informed of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in.

  Further, for example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49 (C), when the ball enters the hole 563A, the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 565. After that, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 565 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 48, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, so selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrical accessory 51 through the communication passage 565, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is open, so the non-electric accessory 51 is used as the ending effect. Select the release notification effect that notifies the player of the release of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 48, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 48 (E). The player is informed of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48 (F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's dialogue "The next jackpot is left-handed 16R confirmation!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second clune 56 functions as a lottery clune having a rolling surface 561 (rolling rolling surface) that rolls the game balls that enter the holes 553A and 553B. There is. The second clune 56 is provided on the rolling surface 561 and is provided with holes 563A to 563C (a plurality of lottery ball entry portions) into which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 561 are entered. And a plurality of lottery ball parts, each hole 563B, 563C (first lottery ball part) that does not shift the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the ball of the game ball, It is provided with a hole 563A (second lottery entry ball portion) for shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. Therefore, the second clune 56 functions as an open / close lottery means for executing a lottery on the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of the game balls into the holes 553A and 553B.

  In the present embodiment, the second clune 56 is adopted as the opening / closing lottery means, but, for example, like the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37, the counter is used. You may use the lottery that you used. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing lottery means draws whether or not the opening / closing entrance means is shifted from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance portion. You may make a lottery whether or not to shift the ball means from the disadvantageous state where it is easy to close to the advantageous state where it is easy to open. In short, the open / close lottery means may be any kind of lottery as long as it can execute the lottery on the open / close entrance means based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance portion.

Here, in the present embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering part) and a lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering part).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 easily causes a game ball to enter the upper working opening 36 and does not easily enter a game ball into the lower working opening 37. A right-handed route (second route) is provided in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operation port 37 and which does not easily cause the game ball to enter the upper operation port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-hand route.

Further, the main controller 60, in the low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of entering the lower working port 37 is lower than in the upper working port 36, and in the lower working port 37 from the upper working port 36. It has a high frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after ending the game in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the game result is the "explicit small round high accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until "big hit" in the win / loss lottery. . Further, when the game result is the “low probability result”, the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), and then, from the high frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

  Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high-accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the player becomes "a big hit" at least in the win / loss lot after finishing the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Up to, the game times can be executed by inserting the game balls into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electrical accessory 51 at least until the “big hit” in the win / win lottery.

  On the other hand, when the game result is a "low probability result", the player finishes the game in the opening / closing execution mode and then executes 100 game times (from the high frequency support mode). The game times can be executed by inserting the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route (until the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball by entering the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player sets the open / close execution mode to the open / close execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played with the expectation of shifting.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is not limited and a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is limited to 100 to set a gaming state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game. Although the state has been created, a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game state may be produced by setting a game state other than these. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. .

According to this embodiment as described above, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 makes it possible to enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the game ball entering the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Since the first clune 55 is provided, and the first clune 55 is provided with the respective holes 553A and 553B that start the game in the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball is entered, the player is in the game state with the main controller 60. After shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by inserting a game ball into each hole 553A, 553B. In addition, since the first clune 55 is provided with the second clune 56 that executes the lottery for the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of the game balls into the holes 553A and 553B, for example, in the second clune 56. When the player wins the lottery to be executed and shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, the player controls the main controller 60 to shift the game state to the next opening / closing execution mode. By inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game of the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A has a higher value than the game of the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the hole 553B. Since the game is given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 553A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode by inserting the game ball into the first clune 55. In addition, when the lottery executed in the second clune 56 is won and the non-electric accessory 51 is moved from the closed state to the open state, the player controls the main controller 60 to change the game state to the next time. After shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, a higher value is given to the player than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. It is possible to start the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) Entering the game ball into the hole 553B can start the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the entering of the game ball into the non-electric auditor 51 and the hole 553A By starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls are paid out, the player has a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game balls enter the hole 553B. Therefore, when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode, the player expects to enter the hole 553A. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The game state transition process starts the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening / closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the hole 553B. However, by setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a number larger than a predetermined number when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A, more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game in the open / close execution mode is started, the player expects to enter the hole 553A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) Since the holes 553A and 553B are provided on the rolling surface 551 of the first clune 55, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the gaming ball that has entered the first clune 55. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) The opening / closing lottery means sets each hole 563B, 563C that does not shift the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the non-electrical accessory 51 based on the entry of the game ball. The second klune 56 is provided with a hole 563A for transitioning from the closed state to the open state. According to this, the opening / closing lottery means independently operates the non-electric accessory 51 without being influenced by the first klune 55 having the holes 553A and 553B for starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode when entering the game ball. It is possible to draw by lot whether or not to shift from the closed state to the open state. Further, when the non-electric accessory 51 is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game balls that have entered the holes 553A and 553B into the holes 563A, the player is required to control the main controller 60. After the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode at the next time, it is higher than the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the hole 553B by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51. It is possible to start the game in the open / close execution mode in which a value is given to the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-shaped body 513, and the closed state by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Since it shifts from the open state to the open state, it is possible to shift the open / closed state using only the weight of the game ball without needing other power such as electric power.

(8) After finishing the game in the opening / closing execution mode, the player goes down through the right-handed route until he / she executes 100 game times (until the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). By inserting a game ball into the operating port 37, it is possible to execute a game time. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball by entering the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player sets the open / close execution mode to the open / close execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played with the expectation of shifting.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a front view of a game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with the clune 53 provided in the region on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. Then, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the clune 53 and drops downward, and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535, shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. I was letting it. In addition, the game balls that have entered the holes 533B and 533C of the clune 53 and dropped downward have been discharged to the game area via the discharge passage 536.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with the clune 53C provided in the region on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, as shown in FIG. Then, all the game balls that have entered any of the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 51) of the clune 53C shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state in the first embodiment. Different from

FIG. 51 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the clune as seen from above.
As shown in FIG. 51, the clune 53C is provided along a disk-shaped rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball guided by the clune 53 via the guide rail 525, and the periphery of the rolling surface 531. And a side wall 532.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 531 and is formed at three holes 533A to 533C formed at equal intervals with each other and at the center of the holes 533A to 533A. It is provided with a protrusion 534 having three side surfaces that are inclined so as to descend toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 532 side toward the holes 533A to 533C side (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the clune 53 through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C (FIG. (See middle arrow A).

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C includes detection sensors 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) that detect the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensors 40i to 40k are arranged on the back surface side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects the entry into the hole 533C. Detects the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when the balls enter the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when the balls enter the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C is an opportunity to start a round game when winning the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery and transitioning to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after entering the opening / closing execution mode, if a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening / closing door 38b. Is set to an open state, and execution of a round game of a predetermined number of times is started.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game 16 times when the ball enters the hole 533A, and thus starts executing the round game 16 times in the hole 533A. A mark is displayed around the hole 533A so as to suggest that.
Further, the pachinko machine 10 starts the execution of the four round games when the ball enters the holes 533B and 533C, so the execution of the four round games is started in the holes 533B and 533C. The mark is not shown to suggest that.

Further, the clune 53C has a communication passage 535 for guiding the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51, and a guide path 539 for guiding the game ball that has entered the holes 533A to 533C and dropped downward to the communication passage 535. I have it.
The guideway 539 includes three upstream guideways 539A connected to the holes 533A to 533C, and a downstream guideway 539B connected to each of the upstream guideways 539A and the communication passage 535. I have it.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the clune 53C selects the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. It is possible to enter the ball, and it functions as a variable ball entering means for shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball.

  Further, the clune 53C is provided with holes 533B and 533C (first entry portion) and holes 533A (second entry portion) into which the game balls entered into the clune 53C are introduced. This clune 53C has a rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball that has entered the clune 53C, and the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 and roll. A game ball rolling on the moving surface 531 is inserted.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53, and the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 531 are inserted. . On the other hand, the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are, for example, the distributions for distributing the game balls entered in the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the distribution mechanism may distribute the game balls to the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion with the same or different probabilities. In short, the variable ball entrance means only needs to include the first ball entrance section and the second ball entrance section.

  Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A are 16 round execution gates for starting execution of 16 round games. Further, the holes 533B and 533C are four-round execution gates for starting execution of four round games. Therefore, the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Value is given to the player.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets a predetermined number (four times in the present embodiment) of the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 at the time of entering a game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C, so that a predetermined number of times is set. The game is started in the open / close execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out, and when the game balls enter the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed is greater than a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, a number of times). (16 times), the game is started in the open / close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is set by setting the number of times of opening / closing the variable winning device 38, and thus each hole 533B, 533C. Although a higher value is given to the player than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball is entered, the holes 533B and 533C are set by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, for example. A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball is entered. In short, the open / close execution mode and the game in the open / close execution mode started when the game ball enters the second entrance section are the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first entrance section. It suffices to give the player a higher value than the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate for starting execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games, and each hole is The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between each of the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate may not be fixed. For example, the correspondence may be changed based on the result of the internal lottery. May be. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can extend the playability and can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering part) and a lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering part).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 easily causes a game ball to enter the upper working opening 36 and does not easily enter a game ball into the lower working opening 37. A right-handed route (second route) is provided in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operation port 37 and which does not easily cause the game ball to enter the upper operation port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-hand route.

Further, the main controller 60, in the low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of entering the lower working port 37 is lower than in the upper working port 36, and in the lower working port 37 from the upper working port 36. It has a high frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after ending the game in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the game result is the "explicit small round high accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until "big hit" in the win / loss lottery. . Further, when the game result is the “low probability result”, the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), and then, from the high frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

  Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high-accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the player becomes "a big hit" at least in the win / loss lot after finishing the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Up to, the game times can be executed by inserting the game balls into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electrical accessory 51 at least until the “big hit” in the win / win lottery.

  On the other hand, when the game result is a "low probability result", the player finishes the game in the opening / closing execution mode and then executes 100 game times (from the high frequency support mode). The game times can be executed by inserting the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route (until the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball by entering the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player sets the open / close execution mode to the open / close execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played with the expectation of shifting.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is not limited and a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is limited to 100 to set a gaming state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game. Although the state has been created, a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game state may be produced by setting a game state other than these. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. .

According to this embodiment as described above, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 makes it possible to enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the game ball entering the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. The clune 53C is provided, and the clune 53C starts the game in the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball is entered. Therefore, the player shifts the gaming state to the opening / closing execution mode in the main controller 60, and then plays the clune 53C. By entering the ball, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started. Further, when the non-electric accessory 51 is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the clune 53C, the player opens and closes the game state in the main controller 60 at the next time. After shifting to the execution mode, by inserting a game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The opening / closing execution mode game started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is more open and closed than the opening execution mode game when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, when the player starts the game in the opening / closing execution mode by inserting the game ball into the clune 53C, the player expects to enter the hole 533A. . Further, when the non-electric accessory 51 is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the clune 53C, the player opens and closes the game state in the main controller 60 at the next time. After shifting to the execution mode, by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, a higher value is given to the player than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It is possible to start the game of the opening / closing execution mode to be given. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of the game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 51 and the game ball into the hole 533A can be started. From the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C by starting the opening / closing execution mode game in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Since a high value is also given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The game state transition process is an opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening / closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a number larger than a predetermined number when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of game balls is set to be larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball is paid out is started, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53C, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the gaming ball that has entered the clune 53C. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(6) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-shaped body 513, and the closed state by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Since it shifts from the open state to the open state, it is possible to shift the open / closed state by using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(7) After finishing the game in the opening / closing execution mode, the player goes down through the right-handed route until he / she executes 100 game times (until the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). By inserting a game ball into the operating port 37, it is possible to execute a game time. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball by entering the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player sets the open / close execution mode to the open / close execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played with the expectation of shifting.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 52 is a front view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has a non-electrical accessory 51, and the non-electrical accessory 51 is provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. In addition, the game ball that entered the hole 533A of the clune 53 and dropped downward was guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the game board 31 has a clune 53D and a non-electrical accessory 57, and the non-electrical accessory 57 of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. It is different from the first embodiment in that it is provided on the upper side. Further, the game ball that has entered the hole 533A of the clune 53D and dropped downward is different from the first embodiment in that it is guided to the non-electric accessory 57 through the communication passage 535D.

  The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31, a general winning opening 35 provided in each opening, an upper working opening (first starting ball entering section) 36, a lower working opening (second starting ball entering section) 37, a variable winning device 38, It has an outlet 39 and a non-electric accessory 57. The non-electric accessory 57 is provided above the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. In addition, the game board 31 has an opening 313 provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. In addition, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the central part left side and the central part right side, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, and a variable display unit 43 provided on the central part. Have Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

  The non-electric accessory 57 is provided on the right side of the game area of the game board 31. Further, the non-electric accessory 57 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 57, unlike when a ball enters the various winning openings. The non-electric accessory 57 will be described later in detail.

  The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a kind of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the drop of the game ball. It is composed.

The center frame 48 has four first holding lamp parts 49a provided in the upper area of the symbol display device 47 and four second holding lamp parts 49b provided in the right area of the first holding lamp part 49a. , And four third holding lamp parts 49c provided in an area above the first holding lamp part 49a.
Further, the center frame 48 has a right variable ball entry mechanism 52 provided in a lower right area of the symbol display device 47, a klune 53D provided in an area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and a symbol display. A guide mechanism 58 provided in the area on the upper right side of the device 47.

The right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52 discharges the game ball flowing down the game area into the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then to the clune 53D and the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52. By switching the discharge route to be performed, it has a function of guiding the game ball that has entered the inside of the right side variable ball input mechanism 52 to the clune route or the discharge route.
The player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 at the maximum, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, it is possible to guide the game ball to the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 (right hitting route).

The clune 53D has substantially the same configuration as that of the first embodiment except the communication passage 535.
Specifically, the clune 53D is connected to a hole 533A formed on the front side (front side) of the game board 31, and the game ball that has entered the hole 533A and dropped downward is a non-electric accessory 57. It is provided with a communication passage 535D for guiding to.

The guide mechanism 58 has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the non-electric accessory 57. Specifically, the guide mechanism 58 has a passage divided into two guide rails that are curved so as to reach the non-electric accessory 57 from the upper part of the game area, and a plurality of passages are formed in the passage. It is formed in a width that the game balls cannot pass through at the same time.
It should be noted that the player makes the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 27 slightly weaker than the maximum and hits it to the right, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting to the side of the opposite side, the game ball can be guided to the inside of the guide mechanism 58 by reaching the entrance 58A of the guide mechanism 58 (weak hitting route).

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the internal structure of a non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 53 (A) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electrical accessory 57 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 53 (B) is an internal structure of the non-electrical accessory 57 viewed from the side. It is a figure.
As shown in FIG. 53, the non-electric accessory 57 is fixed to the pair of blade members 571 provided to face each other in the horizontal direction and the lower end portions of the respective blade members 571, and also to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pair of rotating shafts 572 rotatably provided about orthogonal axes, and a pair of fan-shaped gears 573 fixed concentrically to the rotating shafts 572.

In the closed state of the non-electric accessory 57, each blade member 571 has a facing surface 571A that faces the horizontal direction and is arranged along the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 53 (A). Further, each blade member 571 is provided in the game area (on the front side of the game board 31) as shown in FIG. 53 (B).
Each blade member 571 is provided so that the width of the passage 571B formed between the facing surfaces 571A cannot be simultaneously passed by a plurality of game balls. In addition, the non-electric accessory 57 includes a baffle 57A provided above the entrance of the passage 571B. The distance between the upper end of each blade member 571 and the baffle plate 57A is smaller than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the non-electric accessory 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B when the non-electric accessory 57 is closed.

Of the blade members 571, the blade member 571 on the left side when viewed from the front side has a shaft body 571C formed to have a central axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31.
The non-electric accessory 57 includes a cover 574 provided in the game area so as to cover each of the blade members 571 and the passage 571B.

Further, the non-electrical accessory 57 supports the first arm portion 575A having a columnar shape that is in contact with the shaft body 571C from the upper side and the first arm portion 575A, and is centered on the axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. Is provided with a pair of rotatable shafts 575B and a fan-shaped gear 575C fixed to the rotatable shafts 575B.
Further, the non-electric accessory 57 supports a fan-shaped gear 576A provided so as to mesh with the gear 575C and the gear 576A, and is rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It is provided with a pair of rotation shafts 576B provided and a second arm portion 576C fixed to the rotation shafts 576B.

The second arm portion 576C is provided at a position for receiving the game ball discharged into the hole 533A of the clune 53D, falling downward, and discharged from the discharge port formed below the communication passage 535D.
Therefore, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the clune 53D, falls downward, and is guided to the non-electric accessory 57 through the communication passage 535D is, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the second arm portion. It drops toward 576C.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-electric accessory when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 54 (A) is a diagram of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 54 (B) is a diagram of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 viewed from the side. It is a figure.
The game ball that has dropped toward the second arm portion 576C rotates the gear 576A and the second arm portion 576C about the rotation shaft 576B as shown by the arrow in FIG.
In addition, the game ball that has dropped toward the second arm portion 576C, after rotating the second arm portion 576C, uses the inclination of the second arm portion 576C to travel along the second arm portion 576C to the discharge passage 577. Enter the ball. This discharge passage 577 discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 313 (see FIG. 52).

  Further, since the rotation shaft 575B and the gear 575C rotate with the rotation of the gear 576A, the first arm portion 575A rotates with the rotation of the gear 575C. Then, the first arm portion 575A pushes down the shaft body 571C toward the lower side. Each blade member 571 rotates about the pair of rotation shafts 572 as a central axis via the pair of gears 573 by pushing down the shaft body 571C by the first arm portion 575A. As a result, the non-electric accessory 57 moves from the closed state to the open state.

Here, the non-electrical accessory 57 has a non-electrical accessory open detection sensor 519 for detecting the transition from the closed state to the open state, like the non-electric accessory 51 in the first embodiment. . Note that the non-electrical accessory release detection sensor 519 may be of any type as long as it can detect the release of the non-electrical accessory 57, and for example, a contact sensor or the like can be adopted. .
The distance between the upper end of each blade member 571 and the baffle plate 57A is wider than that for one game ball when the non-electric accessory 57 is open. Therefore, the game ball can enter the non-electrical accessory 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B when the non-electrical accessory 57 is open.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an internal structure of the non-electric accessory when a ball enters the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 55 (A) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 55 (B) is an internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 viewed from the side. It is a figure.
The game ball that has dropped toward the non-electric accessory 57 through the guide mechanism 58 travels along the facing surface 571A on the right side of each facing surface 571A as shown by the arrow in FIG. 55. The central position of the facing surface 571A is reached.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an internal structure of the non-electric accessory after the ball has entered the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 56 (A) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 56 (B) is an internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 viewed from the side. It is a figure.
The game ball that has reached the center position of the facing surface 571A drops downward while rotating each blade member 571, as shown by the arrow in FIG. Specifically, each blade member 571 rotates about a pair of rotation shafts 572 as a central axis via a pair of gears 573.
In addition, the game ball dropped downward while rotating each blade member 571 enters the discharge communication passage 578. The discharge communication passage 578 guides the game ball to the discharge passage 577 described above, and the discharge passage 577 discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 313 (see FIG. 52).

  Further, among the blade members 571, the blade member 571 on the left side when viewed from the front side pushes up the shaft body 571C toward the upper side and pushes up the first arm portion 575A toward the upper side. The rotation shaft 575B and the gear 575C rotate with the rotation of the first arm portion 575A.

  In addition, since the gear 576A and the rotation shaft 576B rotate with the rotation of the gear 575C, the second arm 576C rotates with the rotation of the gear 576A. Then, the second arm portion 576C moves up and returns to the original position. As a result, the non-electric accessory 57 moves from the open state to the closed state.

  The non-electric accessory 57 wins the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, it is an opportunity to start the round game. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the shift to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, and after the shift to the open / close execution mode, when the ball enters the non-electric accessory 57, the open / close door 38b. Is set to an open state, and execution of a round game of a predetermined number of times is started.

  Here, the ball entering the non-electric accessory 57 is determined by detecting whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge passage 577 by the detection sensor 40f. In other words, in the open state of the non-electrical accessory 57, the game ball that has entered the non-electrical accessory 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B, and the non-electrical accessory 57 in the closed state through the communication passage 535D. Both the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 57 is determined as a ball entering the non-electric accessory 57.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game 16 times when a ball enters the non-electrical accessory 57, so the non-electrical accessory 57 includes 16 rounds. The character "16R" which means to start the execution of the game is displayed (see FIG. 52).
In the present embodiment, the non-electrical accessory 57 and the hole 533A for starting the execution of the round game 16 times are referred to as a 16 round execution gate, and the holes 533B, 533C for starting the execution of the round game 4 times are set to 4 respectively. It is called a round execution gate, and the 16 round execution gate and the 4 round execution gate are also collectively referred to as a round game execution gate.

In this way, the non-electric accessory 57 has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is inserted and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted, and It functions as an opening / closing ball entering means for shifting from the open state to the closed state based on the ball entering.
Then, the non-electrical accessory 57 includes each blade member 571 (first receiving portion) that receives the game ball that has entered the non-electrical accessory 57, and the second arm portion 576C (that receives the game ball that has entered the hole 533A ( (2nd receiving part), by receiving the game ball in each blade member 571, transition from the open state to the closed state, by receiving the game ball in the second arm portion 576C, open from the closed state Transition to the state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing ball means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and closes by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion. It was transitioning from the state to the open state. On the other hand, the opening / closing ball means includes, for example, a drive unit that sets the opening / closing ball means to either a closed state or an open state, and a sensor that detects the ball entering the game ball. The open / close ball entrance means may be moved from the open state to the closed state by the drive unit based on the detection of the ball entry. In short, the opening / closing ball means has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and is opened based on the ball entering the game ball. To the closed state.

  In addition, the clune 53D allows the game balls that have entered the clune 53D to enter, and the holes 533B and 533C (first holes) that do not shift the non-electric accessory 57 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game balls. Hole 533A (second ball entry) that allows entry of the game ball entered into the clune 53D and entry of the game ball into the non-electrical accessory 57 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. Section) and. Further, the clune 53D has a rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball that has entered the clune 53D, and the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 and A game ball rolling on the rolling surface 531 is inserted.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53D, and the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 531 are inserted. . On the other hand, the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are, for example, the distributions for distributing the game balls entered in the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the distribution mechanism may distribute the game balls to the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion with the same or different probabilities. In short, the variable ball entrance means only needs to include the first ball entrance section and the second ball entrance section.

  Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A are 16 round execution gates for starting execution of 16 round games. Further, the holes 533B and 533C are four-round execution gates for starting execution of four round games. Therefore, the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Value is given to the player.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets a predetermined number (four times in the present embodiment) of the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 at the time of entering a game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C, thereby setting a predetermined number. The game in the open / close execution mode in which the game balls can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 is larger than a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, when the game balls are inserted into the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A). 16 times), the game is started in the open / close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, the game in the opening / closing execution mode, which is started when the game ball is inserted into the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A, is set by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed, so that the holes 533B and 533C are opened. Although a higher value is given to the player than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball is entered, the holes 533B and 533C are set by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, for example. A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball is entered. In short, the open / close execution mode and the game in the open / close execution mode started when the game ball enters the second entrance section are the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first entrance section. It suffices to give the player a higher value than the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate for starting execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games, and each hole is The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between each of the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate may not be fixed. For example, the correspondence may be changed based on the result of the internal lottery. May be. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can extend the playability and can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering part) and a lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering part).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 easily causes a game ball to enter the upper working opening 36 and does not easily enter a game ball into the lower working opening 37. A right-handed route (second route) is provided in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operation port 37 and which does not easily cause the game ball to enter the upper operation port 36. The non-electrical accessory 57 is arranged on a weakening route (third route) different from the left-handing route and the right-handing route.

Further, the main controller 60, in the low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of entering the lower working port 37 is lower than in the upper working port 36, and in the lower working port 37 from the upper working port 36. It has a high frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after ending the game in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the game result is the "explicit small round high accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until "big hit" in the win / loss lottery. . Further, when the game result is the “low probability result”, the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), and then, from the high frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

  Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high-accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the player becomes "a big hit" at least in the win / loss lot after finishing the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Up to, the game times can be executed by inserting the game balls into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electrical accessory 51 at least until the “big hit” in the win / win lottery.

  On the other hand, when the game result is a "low probability result", the player finishes the game in the opening / closing execution mode and then executes 100 game times (from the high frequency support mode). The game times can be executed by inserting the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route (until the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball by entering the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Further, since the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged on the weakening route, the player shoots the game ball on a route different from the case where the game ball is inserted into the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. This allows the game ball to enter the non-electric accessory 57. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged in the weak hitting route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 57 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. In addition, the game ball does not enter the non-electric accessory 57 without shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode. In this case, the non-electric accessory 57 does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is not limited and a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is limited to 100 to set a gaming state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game. Although the state has been created, a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game state may be produced by setting a game state other than these. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. .

According to this embodiment as described above, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 makes it possible to enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the game ball entering the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. The clune 53D is provided, and since the clune 53D starts the game in the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball is entered, the player shifts the gaming state to the opening / closing execution mode in the main controller 60, and then plays the clune 53D. By entering the ball, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started. In addition, when the non-electric accessory 57 is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the clune 53D, the player opens and closes the game state in the main controller 60 next time. After shifting to the execution mode, by inserting a game ball into the non-electric accessory 57, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game. Further, since the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged on the weakening route, the player shoots the game ball on a route different from the case where the game ball is inserted into the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. This allows the game ball to enter the non-electric accessory 57. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intention and can make the player comfortably play the game.

(2) After finishing the game in the opening / closing execution mode, the player goes down through the right-handed route until he / she executes 100 game times (until the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). By inserting a game ball into the operating port 37, it is possible to execute a game time. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball by entering the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Further, since the non-electrical accessory 57 is arranged on the weakening route, the player moves the non-electrical accessory 57 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. In addition, the game ball does not enter the non-electric accessory 57 without shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode. Therefore, since the non-electric accessory 57 does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(3) The game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A is more than the game in the opening / closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when the game in the opening / closing execution mode is started by inserting the game ball into the clune 53D. . In addition, when the non-electric accessory 57 is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the clune 53D, the player opens and closes the game state in the main controller 60 next time. After shifting to the execution mode, by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 57, the player is given a higher value than the game in the opening / closing execution mode which is started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It is possible to start the game of the opening / closing execution mode to be given. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The entry of the game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 57 and the game ball into the hole 533A can be played. From the game of opening and closing execution mode which is started when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C by starting the game of opening and closing execution mode in which more than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Since a high value is also given to the player, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) The game state transition process is an opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening / closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a number larger than a predetermined number when entering the game ball into the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A, the number of game balls is set to be larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball is paid out is started, the player expects to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53D, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the gaming ball that has entered the clune 53D. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(7) The non-electric accessory 57 moves from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each blade member 571, and from the closed state by receiving the game ball at the second arm portion 576C. Since it shifts to the open state, it is possible to shift the open / closed state using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 57 is an enlarged view of the crune according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention as seen from above.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes the clune 53, and when a ball enters the hole 533A of the clune 53, the round game is started 16 times, and the hole 533B of the clune 53, When a ball entered 533C, execution of the round game was started four times. In other words, the number of times of executing the round game was associated with each of the holes 533A to 533C of the clune 53.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with the clune 53E, and the number of times of executing the round game is different from the first embodiment in that it is not associated with each of the holes 533A to 533C of the clune 53E. .

As shown in FIG. 57, the clune 53E is provided along a disk-shaped rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball guided by the clune 53E via the guide rail 525, and the periphery of the rolling surface 531. And a side wall 532.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 531 and is formed at three holes 533A to 533C formed at equal intervals with each other and at the center of the holes 533A to 533A. The projecting portion 534 includes three side surfaces 534A to 534C that are inclined so as to descend toward the 533C side. The hole 533A is formed at the boundary position between the rolling surface 531 and the side surface 534A of the protrusion 534. The hole 533B is formed at the boundary position between the rolling surface 531 and the side surface 534B of the protrusion 534. The hole 533C is formed at the boundary position between the rolling surface 531 and the side surface 534C of the protrusion 534. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 532 side toward the holes 533A to 533C side (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the klune 53E through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters the hole 533A to 533C.

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C includes detection sensors 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) that detect the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensors 40i to 40k are arranged on the back surface side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects the entry into the hole 533C. Detects the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when the balls enter the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when the balls enter the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

  Each of the holes 533A to 533C is an opportunity to start a round game when winning the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery and transitioning to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after entering the opening / closing execution mode, if a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening / closing door 38b. Is set to an open state, and execution of a round game of a predetermined number of times is started.

  Also, the clune 53E is connected to a hole 533A formed on the front side (front side) of the game board 31, and as shown by an arrow B in the drawing, a game ball that has entered the hole 533A and dropped downward. Is connected to a communication passage 535 for guiding the non-electric accessory 51 (see FIG. 5) and two holes 533B and 533C formed on the back side (back side) of the game board 31, and is indicated by an arrow C in the figure. As shown, it has a discharge passage 536 for discharging the game balls that have entered the holes 533B and 533C and dropped downward into the game area through the openings 311 (see FIG. 2).

  The side surfaces 534A to 534C of the protruding portion 534 are formed of a translucent resin. In addition, the projecting portion 534 includes three two-color light emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 provided on the respective vertically lower sides of the side surfaces 534A to 534C, and an LED driving portion 534D that independently drives each two-color light emitting LED 534A1 to 534C1. I have it. The LED driving unit 534D can cause each of the two-color light emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red or blue light by driving each of the two-color light emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1, and thus cause each side surface 534A to 534C to emit red or blue light. be able to.

<Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100>
FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 58, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM, a RAM 94, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed, and a volatile storage unit that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the two-color light emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the two-color light emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1, and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits the command resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a program ROM 103, a work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

  The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the voice light emission control device 90, and performs a predetermined calculation process based on the command to control the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply to hold the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 103 is executed, and is volatile that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a storage means.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated for drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads out image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47. The character ROM 106 holds bit map format image data of various designs, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bit map image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display contents of the symbol display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning process for the round game execution gate and the round number setting process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process for the round game execution gate and the setting process of the number of rounds in this embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for round game execution gate>
FIG. 59 is a view showing a flowchart of a winning process for a round game execution gate.
In the winning process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S201E to S204 as shown in FIG.

  In step S201E, the MPU 62 determines whether a game ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. In this embodiment, the non-electric accessory 51 and the holes 533A to 533C among the holes 533A to 533C, which are set to the 16 round execution gates, are referred to as 16 round execution gates (round game execution gates), and the MPU 62 is , It is determined whether or not each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the 16-round execution gate has detected the entry of the game ball into the 16-round execution gate. The MPU 62 sets each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C to a 16-round execution gate in a round number setting process described later.

  When the MPU 62 determines in step S201E that the game ball has entered the 16-round execution gate, it sets the 16-round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S202. The 16 round execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the 16 round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201E that the game ball has not entered the 16-round execution gate, whether or not the game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate in step S203E. To judge. In the present embodiment, among the holes 533A to 533C, the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate are referred to as 4-round execution gates (round game execution gates), and the MPU 62 corresponds to the 4-round execution gates. By determining whether or not each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k has detected the entry of the game ball, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. The MPU 62 sets each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C to a four-round execution gate in a round number setting process described later.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203E that the game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate, it sets the 4-round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S204. This 4-round execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203E that the game ball has not entered the four-round execution gate, it does not execute the processing of step S204 and thereafter, and wins for the round game execution gate. The process ends.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a flowchart of round number setting processing.
In the round number setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1012, which is substantially the same as in the first embodiment. Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that it executes step S1013E after executing step S1001 and before executing step S1002.
In step S1013E, the MPU 62 executes the setting process for the round game execution gate.
Hereinafter, the setting process for the round game execution gate will be described in detail.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a setting process for a round game execution gate.
In the setting process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S1701E to S1703E as shown in FIG.
In step S1701E, the MPU 62 executes lottery processing for the round game execution gate. Specifically, in the round game execution gate lottery processing, the MPU 62 executes the lottery as to whether or not to set each of the holes 533A to 533C as the 16 round execution gate with a predetermined probability (50% in the present embodiment). .

  In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the probability of setting the holes 533A to 533C in the 16-round execution gate to 50%, but may be larger than 50% or smaller than 50%. Further, the MPU 62 lowers the probability of setting each hole 533A to 533C in the 16-round execution gate when the game result is the "low probability result", for example, and the game result is the "most advantageous result". In this case, the probability of setting the holes 533A to 533C in the 16-round execution gate may be increased, or the probability of setting the holes 533A to 533C in the 16-round execution gate may be changed according to other game situations. Good.

  In step S1702E, the MPU 62 executes round game execution gate setting processing. Specifically, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets each hole 533A to 533C of the holes 533A to 533C that was won in the lot game execution gate lottery process as a 16 round execution gate, The holes 533A to 533C that have not been won in the lottery process of the game execution gate are set as the 4-round execution gate.

When setting the holes 533A to 533C to the 16-round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C to the 16-round execution gate.
When setting the holes 533A to 533C as the 4-round execution gates, the MPU 62 sets the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C as the 4-round execution gates.

  The MPU 62 causes the RAM 64 to store execution gate information related to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate. Then, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the 16-round execution gate in step S201E based on the execution-gate information stored in the RAM 64, and the game ball in the 4-round execution gate in step S203E. It is determined whether or not has entered.

In step S1703E, the MPU 62 sets a round game execution gate command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the round game execution gate command set in step S1703E to the voice emission control device 90. This round game execution gate command includes execution gate information relating to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C, the 16 round execution gate, and the 4 round execution gate.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the round game execution gate command transmitted from the MPU 62. This processing will be described in detail later.

As described above, in this embodiment, the round game is the first specific game (four round games) and the second specific game (16 times) that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. Round game) and. In addition, the round game that is started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 is the second specific game.
In the present embodiment, the second specific game gives a higher value to the player than the first specific game by changing the number of times of execution of the round game. However, for example, execution of the round game The player may be given a higher value than the first specific game by paying out more game balls than the first specific game without changing the number of times. In short, the second specific game may give the player a higher value than the first specific game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 has a predetermined probability (50% in the present embodiment) of the lottery whether or not to set each hole 533A to 533C in the 16-round execution gate in the round game execution gate lottery processing. Running. Then, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets each hole 533A to 533C that has been won in the lot game execution gate lottery process among the holes 533A to 533C as the 16 round execution gate, and sets the round game execution gate. The holes 533A to 533C that are not won in the lottery process are set as the four-round execution gate. In other words, the MPU 62 executes the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game to start the first specific game and the first specific game which are started when the game balls enter the holes 533A to 533C. 2 specific games are set. Then, the game state transition process starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters the holes 533A to 533C.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 has a predetermined probability (50% in the present embodiment) of whether or not to set each hole 533A to 533C in the 16 round execution gate in the round game execution gate lottery processing. Since the holes are executed, the number of the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate is 0 to 3 among the holes 533A to 533C.
On the other hand, the MPU 62 determines the number of the holes 533A to 533C to be set in the 16-round execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C, and then determines the holes 533A to 533C to be set in the 16-round execution gate. May be. Further, in this case, for example, when the game result is a “low probability result”, the number of the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C is reduced, and the game is played. When the result is the “most advantageous result”, among the holes 533A to 533C, the number of the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate may be increased, and other holes may be set according to the game situation. Of the holes 533A to 533C, the number of holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate may be changed.

In the present embodiment, the game state transition processing in the first embodiment is started so that either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters the holes 533A to 533C. I am configuring.
On the other hand, for example, the game state transition process in the second, fourth, and fifth embodiments, when entering a game ball into each of the holes 533A to 533C, either the first specific game or the second specific game is performed. The game state transition process in the third embodiment may be started, and when the game ball enters the holes 553A and 553B, either the first specific game or the second specific game is started. It may be configured to do so.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes effect determination processing in order to execute an effect for game play, an effect for opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1501 to S1518, which is substantially the same as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1508, or when it determines in step S1501 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, This is different from the first embodiment in that step S1519E is executed before executing S1509.
In step S1519E, the MPU 92 executes a round game execution gate determination process.
Hereinafter, the determination process of the round game execution gate will be described in detail.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process for determining a round game execution gate.
In the round game execution gate determination processing, the MPU 92 executes steps S1801E to S1803E, as shown in FIG. 63.
In step S1801E, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the round game execution gate command transmitted from the MPU 62 is received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that the round game execution gate command has been received, the MPU 92 executes execution gate finalized effect determination processing in step S1802E. In this execution gate finalized effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the effect corresponding to the round game execution gate command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.
Further, the MPU 92 causes the two-color light emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gate to emit red light based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command, Each side surface 534A to 534C is made blue by making each side surface 534A to 534C emit red light and each two-color emitting LED 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the four-round execution gate to emit blue light. Light up.

  In step S1803E, the MPU 92 sets the execution gate finalizing effect command related to the execution gate finalizing effect determined in the execution gate finalizing effect determining process of step S1802E. Then, the MPU 92 stores the execution gate finalizing effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This execution gate confirmation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above. In addition, this execution gate finalizing effect command includes execution gate information related to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C, the 16-round execution gate, and the 4-round execution gate.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the execution gate finalizing effect on the symbol display device 47, based on the execution gate finalizing effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the execution gate finalizing effect.

<Flow when switching to the open / close execution mode>
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the execution gate finalizing effect determination process and the execution gate finalizing effect. Specifically, FIG. 64 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 47. FIG. 64B is an enlarged view of the clune 53E as seen from above.
When shifting to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 arranges each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a reduced display on the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 64 (A). The variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.

  If the MPU 92 determines that the round game execution gate command has been received in step S1801E when the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the execution gate finalization effect determination process is executed in step S1802E. In step S1803E, an execution gate finalization effect command related to the execution gate finalization effect determined in the execution gate finalization effect determination process of step S1802E is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate finalizing effect based on the execution gate finalizing effect command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  In the execution gate finalizing effect determination process, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), sets each of the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gate based on the execution gate information of the command for the round game execution gate. By causing each corresponding two-color light emitting LED 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, each side surface 534A to 534C emits red light, and each two color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate. By making ~ ~ 534C1 emit blue light, each side surface 534A ~ 534C emits blue light.

  In the example of FIG. 64, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 16-round execution gate and sets each hole 533B, 533C as a 4-round execution gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 causes the side surface 534A to emit red light by causing the two-color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set in the 16-round execution gate to emit red light, and each of the four-round execution gates. By making the two-color light emitting LEDs 534B1 and 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533B and 533C emit blue light, the side faces 534B and 534C are made to emit blue light.

  In the execution gate finalizing effect, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD as seen from the upper side of the clune 53E in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 64 (A). Then, the MPU 102, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, corresponds to the side surfaces 534A to 534C of the clune 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate. The area is displayed in red, and the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to the side surfaces 534A to 534C of the clune 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the four-round execution gate is displayed in blue. In addition, the MPU 102 displays the angel's lines “16R for red and 4R for blue!” Present at the lower right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that each hole 533A corresponding to the red area is displayed. ~ 533C are 16-round execution gates, and each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area suggests to the player that it is a 4-round execution gate.

  Hereinafter, after shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A to the 16-round execution gate and the holes 533B and 533C to the 4-round execution gate as shown in FIG. The flow in the case of setting to will be described in detail.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device, a non-electric accessory, and a right-side variable ball entry mechanism in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that, in FIG. 65, the non-electric accessory 51 is simplified in the lower left part of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 65 (A) is a diagram showing the display screen G after the execution gate finalizing effect is executed. 65 (B) and 65 (C) are diagrams showing a display screen G when a ball has entered the four-round execution gate. FIGS. 65D and 65E are diagrams showing a display screen G when a ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 65 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G in the case where the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

  After executing the execution gate finalizing effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening time command has been received. Therefore, in step S1602, the non-opening time effect determining process is executed, and in step S1603, A command for non-opening effect related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), displays the angel's dialogue "Aiming at the clune by right-handing!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggests to the player to hit right.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route (see arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the open state, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. To enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the clean route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53E via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the clune 53E via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

  When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the four-round execution command has been received, and thus, in step S1608, the four-round execution effect. Is executed, and in step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command relating to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "4R confirmed! Right hit!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, Inform the player that he will start playing four rounds.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When a ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, and thus the non-electric accessory is used as the ending effect. A normal effect that does not notify the player of opening 51 is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 65 (C). The player is informed of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16 round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16 round execution effect command relating to the 16 round execution effect determined in the 16 round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the MPU 102 displays the serif “16R confirmed! Right hit!” Of the angel present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Inform the player that he will start executing 16 round games. In addition, the game ball which enters the hole 533A of the clune 53E and falls down and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, so selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When a ball enters the hole 533A (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is open, and thus the ending effect of the non-electrical accessory 51 is determined. Select the release notification effect that notifies the player of the release. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed of the shift to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's dialogue “Next jackpot is left-handed 16R confirmed!” In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing another example of the execution gate finalizing effect determination process and the execution gate finalizing effect. Specifically, FIG. 66A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 47. FIG. 66 (B) is an enlarged view of the clune 53E as seen from above.
When shifting to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 displays each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a reduced display as shown in FIG. The variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.

  If the MPU 92 determines that the round game execution gate command has been received in step S1801E when the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the execution gate finalization effect determination process is executed in step S1802E. In step S1803E, an execution gate finalization effect command related to the execution gate finalization effect determined in the execution gate finalization effect determination process of step S1802E is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate finalizing effect based on the execution gate finalizing effect command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  In the execution gate finalization effect determination process, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 66B, sets each of the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gate based on the execution gate information of the command for the round game execution gate. By causing each corresponding two-color light emitting LED 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, each side surface 534A to 534C emits red light, and each two color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate. By making ~ ~ 534C1 emit blue light, each side surface 534A ~ 534C emits blue light.

  In the example of FIG. 66, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 4-round execution gate and sets each hole 533B, 533C as a 16-round execution gate. Accordingly, the MPU 92 causes the side surface 534A to emit blue light by causing the two-color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set in the 4 round execution gate to emit blue light, and each of the 16 round execution gates. The two-color LEDs 534B1 and 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533B and 533C are caused to emit red light, so that the side surfaces 534B and 534C are caused to emit red light.

  In the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD as seen from above from the clune 53E in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 66 (A). Then, the MPU 102, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, corresponds to the side surfaces 534A to 534C of the clune 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate. The area is displayed in red, and the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to the side surfaces 534A to 534C of the clune 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the four-round execution gate is displayed in blue. In addition, the MPU 102 displays the angel's lines “16R for red and 4R for blue!” Present at the lower right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that each hole 533A corresponding to the red area is displayed. ~ 533C are 16-round execution gates, and each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area suggests to the player that it is a 4-round execution gate.

  Hereinafter, after the non-motorized accessory 51 is switched to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A to the 4-round execution gate and the holes 533B and 533C to the 16-round execution gate, as shown in FIG. The flow in the case of setting to will be described in detail.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device, a non-electric accessory, and a right-side variable ball entry mechanism in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that, in FIG. 67, the non-electric accessory 51 is simplified and illustrated at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 67 (A) is a diagram showing the display screen G after the execution gate finalizing effect is executed. 67 (B) and 67 (C) are diagrams showing a display screen G when a ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. 67 (D) and 67 (E) are diagrams showing a display screen G when a ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. FIG. 67 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G in the case where the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

  After executing the execution gate finalizing effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening time command has been received. Therefore, in step S1602, the non-opening time effect determining process is executed, and in step S1603, A command for non-opening effect related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “At the right aiming at the crune!” In the lower right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. This suggests to the player to hit right.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route (see arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the open state, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. To enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the clean route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53E via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the clune 53E via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

  When the ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the 16 round execution command is received in step S1610, and thus the 16 round execution effect is generated in step S1611. Is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round execution effect command relating to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the MPU 102 displays the serif “16R confirmed! Right hit!” Of the angel present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Inform the player that he will start executing 16 round games.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 67, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L, so that the MPU 92 It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, so selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When the ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, and thus the non-electric accessory 51 is used as the ending effect. Select the normal effect that does not notify the player of the release of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 67, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 67 (C). The player is informed of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the hole 533A (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the four-round execution command has been received, and therefore, in step S1608, 4 is executed. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command relating to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the MPU 102 displays an angel's line “4R confirmed! Right hit!” In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, Inform the player that he will start playing four rounds. In addition, the game ball which enters the hole 533A of the clune 53E and falls down and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 67, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L, so that the MPU 92 It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When a ball enters the hole 533A (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is open, and thus the non-electrical accessory 51 is used as the ending effect. Select the release notification effect that notifies the player of the release. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 67, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's dialogue "Next jackpot is left-handed 16R confirmed!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 67 (F). , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the hole 533A is set to the four-round execution gate in the round game execution gate setting processing in step S1013E, and when a ball enters the hole 533A, four round games are performed. Can be started, and the non-electric accessory 51 can be shifted from the closed state to the open state.
On the other hand, in the round game execution gate setting process of step S1013E, the hole 533A is set to the 16 round execution gate, and when the ball enters the hole 533A, the execution of 16 round games is started. In addition to the above, the non-electric accessory 51 can be moved from the closed state to the open state.
Therefore, when the player starts the round game by inserting the game ball into the clune 53E, the player expects the game ball to enter the hole 533A and expects to start 16 round games. It will be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, each hole 533B, 533C is set as a four-round execution gate in the round game execution gate setting process of step S1013E, and when a ball enters each hole 533B, 533C, it is set to 4 The execution of the round game can be started.
On the other hand, in the round game execution gate setting process of step S1013E, each hole 533B, 533C is set as a 16 round execution gate, and if a ball enters each hole 533B, 533C, 16 times. The execution of the round game can be started.
Therefore, the player expects to start 16 round games when starting the round game by inserting the game balls into the holes 533B and 533C.

  The flow in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened will be described in detail below.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device, a non-electric accessory, and a right-side variable ball entry mechanism in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is opened. 68, the non-electric accessory 51 is simplified in the lower left part of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing the display screen G after the execution gate finalizing effect is executed. 68 (B) and 68 (C) are diagrams showing a display screen G when a ball has entered the non-electric accessory 51.

  After executing the execution gate finalizing effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the open time command has been received, so in step S1605, the open time determining process is executed, and in step S1606, the step S1605 is executed. A command for opening effect related to the opening effect determined in the opening effect determination process is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the opening time effect based on the opening time effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 suggests that the player left-hands by displaying the angel's dialogue "16R confirmed by left-handing!" Present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. ..

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route (see arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the open state, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. To enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the clean route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53E via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the clune 53E via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.
When a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the pachinko machine 10 executes the same process as when the non-electric accessory 51 is in the open / closed execution mode when not opened.

  When a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16 round execution command has been received, so in step S1611, 16 round execution is performed. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the MPU 102 displays the serif “16R confirmed! Right hit!” Of the angel present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Inform the player that he will start executing 16 round games. In addition, the game ball that has entered the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the open state to the closed state.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 68, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L, so that the MPU 92 It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, so selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, and thus the non-electric accessory is used as the ending effect. A normal effect that does not notify the player of the opening of 51 is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 68, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 68C. The player is informed of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in.

Here, in the present embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering part) and a lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering part).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 easily causes a game ball to enter the upper working opening 36 and does not easily enter a game ball into the lower working opening 37. A right-handed route (second route) is provided in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operation port 37 and which does not easily cause the game ball to enter the upper operation port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-hand route.

Further, the main controller 60, in the low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of entering the lower working port 37 is lower than in the upper working port 36, and in the lower working port 37 from the upper working port 36. It has a high frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after ending the game in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the game result is the "explicit small round high accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until "big hit" in the win / loss lottery. . Further, when the game result is the “low probability result”, the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), and then, from the high frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

  Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high-accuracy result" or the "most advantageous result", the player becomes "a big hit" at least in the win / loss lot after finishing the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Up to, the game times can be executed by inserting the game balls into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electrical accessory 51 at least until the “big hit” in the win / win lottery.

  On the other hand, when the game result is a "low probability result", the player finishes the game in the opening / closing execution mode and then executes 100 game times (from the high frequency support mode). The game times can be executed by inserting the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handing route (until the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower working port 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball by entering the game ball into the upper working port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. If the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player sets the open / close execution mode to the open / close execution mode before executing 100 game times. A game can be played with the expectation of shifting.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is not limited and a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times is limited to 100 to set a gaming state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game. Although the state has been created, a game state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous game state may be produced by setting a game state other than these. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. .

Here, when the open / close execution mode is entered when the non-electrical accessory 51 is opened, the player causes the clune 53E to enter the holes 533A to 533C or enters the non-electrical accessory 51. You can choose whether to generate a sphere.
Therefore, for example, the player shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, and when the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result”, the clune 53E By aiming to enter the 16-round execution gate or the 4-round execution gate, the high-probability mode can be continued while maintaining the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. After that, the player shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electrical accessory 51 is opened, and when the game result is a "low probability result", by aiming to enter the non-electrical accessory 51, Since the non-electric accessory 51 can be shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player executes 100 game times after shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. By the time, if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, it is possible to avoid the situation where the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened and the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode, the player causes the clune 53E to enter the holes 533A to 533C based on the result of the execution gate finalizing effect. , It is possible to select whether to generate a ball to enter the non-electric accessory 51.
For example, the player compares the number of 16-round execution gates with the number of 4-round execution gates, and when the number of 16-round execution gates is large (see, for example, FIG. 66), the 16-round execution of the clune 53E. By aiming to enter the gate or the 4-round execution gate, it is possible to aim to enter the 16-round execution gate of the clune 53E while maintaining the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. In particular, if the number of 16-round execution gates is three, that is, if all the holes 533A to 533C are set as 16-round execution gates in the round game execution gate setting processing in step S1013E, By aiming at the 16-round execution gate of the clune 53E, it is possible to reliably aim at the 16-round execution gate of the clune 53E while keeping the non-electric accessory 51 open. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the opening / closing entrance means is changed from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of one game ball, but from the open state based on the entry of two or more game balls. You may move to a closed state.
When the opening / closing ball means is configured in this way, for example, the player keeps the opening / closing ball means in the open state even after the first game ball is inserted into the opening / closing ball means. Since it is possible, it is possible to diversify the order of aiming at the round game execution gate. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can further expand the options of the player and further improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the same actions and effects as (6) and (7) in the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 makes it possible to enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the game ball entering the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. The clune 53E is provided, and the clune 53E is provided with the holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball is entered, so that the player uses the main controller 60 to open / close the playing state. After shifting to, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by inserting a game ball into each of the holes 533A to 533C. Further, the hole 533A shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so that the player shifts the game state to the next opening / closing execution mode by the main controller 60. After that, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening / closing execution mode includes a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the game state transition process is performed for each hole 533A. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started at the time of entering the game ball into ~ 533C, the player inserts the game ball into the clune 53E and thereby the game in the open / close execution mode. When starting, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can further improve the player's attention to the game.
(3) The main control device 60 executes the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby starting the first specific game when the game ball enters the holes 533A to 533C. Since the second specific game is set, the player pays attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) Since the game state transition process starts the first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second specific game in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls are started, When starting the game in the open / close execution mode, the player expects to start the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(5) In the game state transition process, the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 is started by setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number to start a first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. By setting the number of times more than the predetermined number of times, the second specific game in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started. Therefore, when the player starts the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, it is expected that the second specific game is started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(6) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53E, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the gaming ball that has entered the clune 53E. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Seventh Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the sixth embodiment, the game board 31 includes the clune 53E, and the gaming ball guided by the clune 53E enters one of the holes 533A to 533C to enter the holes 533A to 533C of the clune 53E. When the ball was generated, the execution of 16 round games or 4 round games was started. In other words, the game ball guided to the clune 53E has started executing the round game without exception.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game ball guided to the clune 53E is different from the sixth embodiment in that the execution of the round game is not necessarily started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that in the sixth embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the setting process for the round game execution gate is different from that in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the setting process for the round game execution gate in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 69 is a view showing a flowchart of the setting process for the round game execution gate according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention.
In the setting process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S1704F to S1703F. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the MPU 92 executes steps S1701F and S1703F instead of steps S1701E and S1703E, and executes the step S1704F before executing step S1701F. Different from the embodiment.

  In step S1704F, the MPU 62 executes replay gate selection processing. Specifically, in the replay gate selection processing, the MPU 62 selects any one of the holes 533A to 533C and sets it as the replay gate. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 selects any one of the holes 533A to 533C and sets it as the replay gate, but it may select a plurality of holes and set it as the replay gate. Further, in the present embodiment, the selection probabilities of the holes 533A to 533C are the same, but they may be different.

When setting each hole 533A-533C as a replay gate, MPU62 sets each detection sensor 40i-40k corresponding to each hole 533A-533C as a replay gate.
Specifically, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate, the pachinko machine 10 performs the award ball (similar to the case where a ball enters each of the various winning openings). In this embodiment, three payouts are executed. The pachinko machine 10, for example, sets the hole 533A as a replay gate in the replay gate selection processing in step S1704F, and when a ball enters the hole 533A, pays out three prize balls, When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C, prize balls are not paid out.

  In step S1701F, the MPU 62 executes lottery processing for the round game execution gate. Specifically, in the round game execution gate lottery processing, the MPU 62 selects whether or not to set each hole 533A to 533C among the holes 533A to 533C that has not been set as a replay gate to the 16 round execution gate. Is executed with a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment).

  In step S1702E, the MPU 62 executes round game execution gate setting processing. Specifically, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets each hole 533A to 533C of the holes 533A to 533C that was won in the lot game execution gate lottery process as a 16 round execution gate, The holes 533A to 533C that have not been won in the lottery process of the game execution gate are set as the 4-round execution gate.

When setting the holes 533A to 533C to the 16-round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C to the 16-round execution gate.
When setting the holes 533A to 533C as the 4-round execution gates, the MPU 62 sets the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C as the 4-round execution gates.

  The MPU 62 causes the RAM 64 to store execution gate information related to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C, the replay gate, the 16-round execution gate, and the 4-round execution gate. Then, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the 16-round execution gate in step S201E based on the execution-gate information stored in the RAM 64, and the game ball in the 4-round execution gate in step S203E. It is determined whether or not has entered.

In step S1703F, the MPU 62 sets a round game execution gate command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the round game execution gate command set in step S1703F to the voice emission control device 90. This round game execution gate command includes execution gate information related to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C, the replay gate, the 16 round execution gate, and the 4 round execution gate. .
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the round game execution gate command transmitted from the MPU 62. This processing will be described in detail later.

As described above, in this embodiment, the round game is the first specific game (four round games) and the second specific game (16 times) that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. Round game) and. In addition, the round game that is started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 is the second specific game.
In the present embodiment, the second specific game gives a higher value to the player than the first specific game by changing the number of times of execution of the round game. However, for example, execution of the round game The player may be given a higher value than the first specific game by paying out more game balls than the first specific game without changing the number of times. In short, the second specific game may give the player a higher value than the first specific game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 has a predetermined probability (50% in the present embodiment) of the lottery whether or not to set each hole 533A to 533C in the 16-round execution gate in the round game execution gate lottery processing. Running. Then, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets each hole 533A to 533C that has been won in the lot game execution gate lottery process among the holes 533A to 533C as the 16 round execution gate, and sets the round game execution gate. The holes 533A to 533C that are not won in the lottery process are set as the four-round execution gate. In other words, the MPU 62 executes the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game to start the first specific game and the first specific game which are started when the game balls enter the holes 533A to 533C. 2 specific games are set. Then, the game state transition process starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters the holes 533A to 533C.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 has a predetermined probability (50% in the present embodiment) of whether or not to set each hole 533A to 533C in the 16 round execution gate in the round game execution gate lottery processing. Since the holes are executed, the number of the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate is 0 to 2 among the holes 533A to 533C.
On the other hand, the MPU 62 determines the number of the holes 533A to 533C to be set in the 16-round execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C, and then determines the holes 533A to 533C to be set in the 16-round execution gate. May be. Further, in this case, for example, when the game result is a “low probability result”, the number of the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C is reduced, and the game is played. When the result is the “most advantageous result”, among the holes 533A to 533C, the number of the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate may be increased, and other holes may be set according to the game situation. Of the holes 533A to 533C, the number of holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate may be changed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the sixth embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the round game execution gate determination processing is different from that in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the round game execution gate determination processing in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a round game execution gate determination process.
In the round game execution gate determination processing, the MPU 92 executes steps S1801E to S1803F. Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the MPU 92 differs from the sixth embodiment in that steps S1802F and S1803F are executed instead of steps S1802E and S1803E.

In step S1801E, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the round game execution gate command transmitted from the MPU 62 is received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that the round game execution gate command has been received, the MPU 92 executes execution gate finalized effect determination processing in step S1802F. In this execution gate finalized effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the effect corresponding to the round game execution gate command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.
Further, the MPU 92 causes the two-color light emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gate to emit red light based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command, Each side surface 534A to 534C is made blue by making each side surface 534A to 534C emit red light and each two-color emitting LED 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the four-round execution gate to emit blue light. Light up. Then, based on the execution gate information of the command for the round game execution gate, the MPU 92 prevents the two-color light emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate from emitting light. The side surfaces 534A to 534C are prevented from emitting light.

  In step S1803F, the MPU 92 sets the execution gate finalization effect command related to the execution gate finalization effect determined in the execution gate finalization effect determination process of step S1802F. Then, the MPU 92 stores the execution gate finalizing effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This execution gate confirmation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above. In addition, this execution gate finalizing effect command includes execution gate information related to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C, the replay gate, the 16-round execution gate, and the 4-round execution gate. I'm out.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the execution gate finalizing effect on the symbol display device 47, based on the execution gate finalizing effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the execution gate finalizing effect.

<Flow when switching to the open / close execution mode>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the execution gate finalizing effect determination process and the execution gate finalizing effect. Specifically, FIG. 71A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 47. FIG. 71 (B) is an enlarged view of the clune 53E as seen from above.
When the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and arranges the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 71 (A). The variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.

  If the MPU 92 determines that the round game execution gate command has been received in step S1801E when the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the execution gate finalization effect determination process is executed in step S1802F. In step S1803F, an execution gate finalization effect command related to the execution gate finalization effect determined in the execution gate finalization effect determination process of step S1802F is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate finalizing effect based on the execution gate finalizing effect command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  In the execution gate finalization effect determination process, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), sets each hole 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gate based on the execution gate information of the command for the round game execution gate. By causing each corresponding two-color light emitting LED 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, each side surface 534A to 534C emits red light, and each two color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate. By making ~ ~ 534C1 emit blue light, each side surface 534A ~ 534C emits blue light. Then, based on the execution gate information of the command for round game execution gate, the MPU 92 prevents the two-color light emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate from emitting light. The side surfaces 534A to 534C are prevented from emitting light.

In the example of FIG. 71, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as the 16-round execution gate and sets the hole 533B as the 4-round execution gate. Accordingly, the MPU 92 causes the side surface 534A to emit red light by causing the two-color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set to the 16-round execution gate to emit red light, and the hole set to the 4-round execution gate. The side surface 534B is caused to emit blue light by causing the two-color light emitting LED 534B1 corresponding to 533B to emit blue light.
Further, in the example of FIG. 71, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533C as the replay gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 prevents the side surface 534C from emitting light by preventing the two-color emitting LED 534C1 corresponding to the hole 533C set in the replay gate from emitting light.

  In the execution gate finalizing effect, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD as seen from the upper side of the clune 53E in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 71 (A). Then, the MPU 102, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, corresponds to the side surfaces 534A to 534C of the clune 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate. The area is displayed in red, and the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to the side surfaces 534A to 534C of the clune 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the four-round execution gate is displayed in blue. In addition, the MPU 102, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to the side surfaces 534A to 534C of the clune 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate. Display in white. In addition, the MPU 102 displays the angel's lines “16R for red and 4R for blue!” Present at the lower right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that each hole 533A corresponding to the red area is displayed. ~ 533C are 16-round execution gates, and each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area suggests to the player that it is a 4-round execution gate.

  Hereinafter, after shifting to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, as shown in FIG. 71, the hole 533A is set to the 16-round execution gate and the hole 533B is set to the 4-round execution gate in the MPU 62. The flow when the hole 533C is set as the replay gate will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Incidentally, regardless of the setting status of the round game execution gate or the opening status of the non-electric accessory 51, the flow when a ball enters the replay gate is similar, so the setting status of the round game execution gate or A description according to the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 is omitted.

  After executing the execution gate finalizing effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening time command has been received. Therefore, in step S1602, the non-opening time effect determining process is executed, and in step S1603, A command for non-opening effect related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), displays the angel's dialogue "Aiming at the clune by right-handing!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggests to the player to hit right.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route (see arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the open state, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. To enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the clean route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53E via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the clune 53E via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

  When a ball enters the hole 533B (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the four-round execution command is received in step S1607, and thus determines the four-round execution effect in step S1608. The process is executed, and in step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command relating to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "4R confirmed! Right hit!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, Inform the player that he will start playing four rounds.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When the ball enters the hole 533B (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open, and thus the non-electrical accessory 51 is opened as the ending effect. Select a normal effect that does not notify the player. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 65 (C). The player is informed of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16 round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16 round execution effect command relating to the 16 round execution effect determined in the 16 round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the MPU 102 displays the serif “16R confirmed! Right hit!” Of the angel present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Inform the player that he will start executing 16 round games. In addition, the game ball which enters the hole 533A of the clune 53E and falls down and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, so selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When a ball enters the hole 533A (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is open, and thus the ending effect of the non-electrical accessory 51 is determined. Select the release notification effect that notifies the player of the release. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed of the shift to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in. After that, the MPU 102 displays, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the angel's dialogue "The next jackpot is left-handed 16R confirmed!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

When a ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 62 pays out three prize balls.
Further, since the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1006, it does not execute the discharge route setting process in step S1012. Therefore, the MPU 62 maintains the plate 523a in the closed state and the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clean route. In other words, the game ball will newly enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a by utilizing the inclination of the blade member 521a. As long as there is no entry to the round execution gate, prize balls can be paid out.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate and the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate enter the game balls entering the clune 53E. It is possible and functions as a specific ball entry unit that controls a round game based on the entry of a game ball. Further, the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate allow the game balls entered into the clune 53E to enter, and function as non-specific entering parts that do not control the round game based on the entering of the game balls.
In the present embodiment, the specific ball entering unit controls the round game by starting the round game based on the ball entering the game ball, and the non-specific ball entering unit plays the round game based on the ball entering the game ball. By not starting, I was supposed to not control the round game. On the other hand, for example, the game state transition means starts a round game regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion and the non-specific ball entering portion, and the specific ball entering portion enters the game ball. It controls the round game by shifting to the high probability mode based on the ball, and the non-specific entrance ball unit does not control the round game by not shifting to the high probability mode based on the ball entering the game ball. May be. In short, the specific ball entry unit may control the round game based on the ball entry of the game ball, and the non-specific ball entry unit may not control the round game based on the ball entry of the game ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the non-specific ball entering portion is set so as not to shift the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball, and the specific ball entering portion is The non-electric accessory 51 is set to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball.
Further, in the present embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate execute the payout of the game balls based on the entry of the game balls. In the present embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate execute the payout of the game balls based on the entry of the game balls, but the payout of the game balls may not be executed.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the same actions and effects as (6) and (7) in the first embodiment and (4) to (6) in the sixth embodiment can be achieved. The following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 makes it possible to enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the game ball entering the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. The clune 53E is provided, and the clune 53E is provided with a specific entry portion that controls the game in the opening / closing execution mode when entering the game ball. After the transition, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be controlled by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entering portion. Further, since the non-specific ball entry unit does not control the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball, the player can re-enter the game ball into the clune 53E. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) Since the non-specific ball entering section executes payout of the game ball based on the ball entering the game ball, the player shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode in the main controller 60, and then the non-specific ball By inserting the game balls into the ball portion, it is possible to increase the game balls without starting the game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(3) Since the specific ball entering portion shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball, the player controls the main controller 60 to change the game state to the next specific control. After shifting to the state, by inserting a game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The game in the opening / closing execution mode includes a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the game state transition process is a specific ball entry. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters the club, the player starts the round game by allowing the game ball to enter the specific ball unit. If you do, you will expect to start the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can further improve the player's attention to the game.
(5) The main control device 60 executes the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby starting the first specific game that is started when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section. Since the second specific game is set, the player pays attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the non-specific ball entering section is set so as not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball, and the specific ball entering section is Although it is set to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, it may be set in the opposite relationship. Specifically, the specific ball entering portion is set so as not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball, and the non-specific ball entering portion is the game ball. The non-electric accessory 51 may be set to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the ball.
According to this, the non-specific ball entering portion shifts the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so that the player then moves the non-electrical accessory 51 to the game ball. By entering the ball, the round game can be started without entering the game ball into the specific ball entering portion. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

[Eighth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, an eighth embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, the clune 53E includes the hole 533C set in the replay gate, and when a ball enters the hole 533C, the MPU 62 executes payout of three prize balls. ..
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 62 selects the replay gate, the round game execution gate lottery process, and the round game execution gate. This is different from the seventh embodiment in that the setting process of is re-executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that in the seventh embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning process for the round game execution gate and the round number setting process are different from those in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process for the round game execution gate and the setting process of the number of rounds in this embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for round game execution gate>
FIG. 72 is a view showing a flowchart of the winning process for the round game execution gate according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention.
In the winning process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S201E to S206G. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S205G and subsequent steps when it is determined in step S203E that the game ball has not entered the 4-round execution gate. It is different from the seventh embodiment.

  In step S205G, the MPU 62 determines whether a game ball has entered the replay gate. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the replay gate by determining whether or not each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the replay gate has detected the entry of the game ball. judge.

  When determining that the game ball has entered the replay gate in step S205G, the MPU 62 sets the replay flag in the RAM 64 in step S206G. This replay flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the replay gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205G that the game ball has not entered the replay gate, it executes the winning process for the round game execution gate without executing the process of step S206G and thereafter. finish.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of round number setting processing.
In the round number setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1012, which is substantially the same as in the seventh embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S1014G and subsequent steps when it determines that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1006. Different from the seventh embodiment.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, it determines in step S1014G whether or not the replay flag is set in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether the game ball has entered the replay gate after executing the clune route setting process.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014G that the replay flag has not been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes step S1006 again.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014G that the replay flag has been set in the RAM 64, in step S1015G, the round game execution gate setting process is executed. The setting process for the round game execution gate in step S1015G is the same as the setting process for the round game execution gate in step S1013E.

In step S1016G, the MPU 62 clears the replay flag stored in the RAM 64.
In step S1017G, the MPU 62 sets the gate reset command, and then executes step S1006 again. In step S401 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the gate reset command set in step S1017G to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the gate reset command transmitted from the MPU 62. This processing will be described in detail later.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the seventh embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the round game execution gate determination processing is different from that in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the round game execution gate determination processing in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a round game execution gate determination process.
In the round game execution gate determination processing, the MPU 92 executes steps S1801E to S1803F. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that the round game execution gate command has been received, it executes the processing in step S1804G and thereafter. Different from the seventh embodiment.

In step S1804G, the MPU 92 determines whether the gate reset command transmitted from the MPU 62 is received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1804G that the gate reset command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing in step S1802F and subsequent steps, as in the seventh embodiment.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1804G that the gate reset command is received, in step S1805G the MPU 92 executes gate reset effect determination processing. In the gate resetting effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the effect corresponding to the gate resetting command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

  In step S1806G, the MPU 92 sets a command for gate resetting effect related to the gate resetting effect determined in the gate resetting effect determination process of step S1805G. Then, the MPU 92 stores the gate resetting effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This gate resetting effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the gate resetting effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the command for gate resetting effect transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the gate resetting effect.

<Flow when switching to the open / close execution mode>
Hereinafter, after shifting to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, as shown in FIG. 71, the hole 533A is set to the 16-round execution gate and the hole 533B is set to the 4-round execution gate in the MPU 62. The flow when the hole 533C is set as the replay gate will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Incidentally, regardless of the setting status of the round game execution gate or the opening status of the non-electric accessory 51, the flow when a ball enters the replay gate is similar, so the setting status of the round game execution gate or A description according to the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 is omitted.

  After executing the execution gate finalizing effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening time command has been received. Therefore, in step S1602, the non-opening time effect determining process is executed, and in step S1603, A command for non-opening effect related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), displays the angel's dialogue "Aiming at the clune by right-handing!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggests to the player to hit right.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the clune route setting processing in step S1005. In this clune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clune route (see arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is opened and closed intermittently in a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the open state, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. To enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, by setting the plate 523a in the closed state, when the clean route is set, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53E via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the clune 53E via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

  When a ball enters the hole 533B (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the four-round execution command is received in step S1607, and thus determines the four-round execution effect in step S1608. The process is executed, and in step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command relating to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "4R confirmed! Right hit!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, Inform the player that he will start playing four rounds.

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When the ball enters the hole 533B (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open, and thus the non-electrical accessory 51 is opened as the ending effect. Select a normal effect that does not notify the player. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 65 (C). The player is informed of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16 round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16 round execution effect command relating to the 16 round execution effect determined in the 16 round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the MPU 102 displays the serif “16R confirmed! Right hit!” Of the angel present in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Inform the player that he will start executing 16 round games. In addition, the game ball which enters the hole 533A of the clune 53E and falls down and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let

  Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the open state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the discharge route (see arrow in the figure). ).

  After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 The determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) as the stop result on the activated line L. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, so selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  After ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore in step S1515, executes non-electric auditors object release determination processing. When a ball enters the hole 533A (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electrical accessory 51 is open, and thus the ending effect of the non-electrical accessory 51 is determined. Select the release notification effect that notifies the player of the release. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed of the shift to the high-probability mode by displaying the line of the angel “probable change rush!” Existing in. After that, the MPU 102 displays, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the angel's dialogue "The next jackpot is left-handed 16R confirmed!" In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

When a ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 62 pays out three prize balls.
Further, since the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1006, it does not execute the discharge route setting process in step S1012. Therefore, the MPU 62 maintains the plate 523a in the closed state and the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the clean route. In other words, the game ball will newly enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a by utilizing the inclination of the blade member 521a. As long as there is no entry to the round execution gate, prize balls can be paid out.

  In addition, when a ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1804G that the gate reset command is received, and thus in step S1805G, the gate reset effect is determined. The process is executed, and in step S1806G, a gate resetting effect command related to the gate resetting effect determined in the gate resetting effect determination process of step S1805G is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the gate resetting effect based on the command for gate resetting effect transmitted from the MPU 92.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a gate resetting effect. Specifically, FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 47.
In the gate resetting effect, the MPU 102 displays the devil's dialogue “Shuffle the gate!” Present on the left side of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. Instruct the player to perform a reset of the run gate and replay gate.

  After that, the MPU 92 executes the execution gate finalization effect determination process in step S1802F, and in step S1803F, the execution gate finalization effect command related to the execution gate finalization effect determined in the execution gate finalization effect determination process of step S1802F. To set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate finalizing effect based on the execution gate finalizing effect command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of an execution gate finalizing effect determination process and an execution gate finalizing effect after executing the gate resetting effect. Specifically, FIG. 76 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 47. FIG. 76 (B) is an enlarged view of the clune 53E as seen from above.

  In the execution gate finalizing effect determination process, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), sets each of the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gate based on the execution gate information of the command for the round game execution gate. By causing each corresponding two-color light emitting LED 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, each side surface 534A to 534C emits red light, and each two color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate. By making ~ ~ 534C1 emit blue light, each side surface 534A ~ 534C emits blue light. Then, based on the execution gate information of the command for round game execution gate, the MPU 92 prevents the two-color light emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate from emitting light. The side surfaces 534A to 534C are prevented from emitting light.

In the example of FIG. 76, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as the 4-round execution gate and sets the hole 533C as the 16-round execution gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 causes the side surface 534A to emit blue light by causing the two-color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set to the 4-round execution gate to emit blue light, and the hole set to the 16-round execution gate. The two-color LED 534C1 corresponding to 533C is caused to emit red light, whereby the side surface 534C is caused to emit red light.
Further, in the example of FIG. 76, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533B as the replay gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 prevents the side surface 534B from emitting light by preventing the two-color emitting LED 534B1 corresponding to the hole 533B set in the replay gate from emitting light.

  In the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD as seen from the upper side of the clune 53E in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 76 (A). Then, the MPU 102, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, corresponds to the side surfaces 534A to 534C of the clune 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate. The area is displayed in red, and the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to the side surfaces 534A to 534C of the clune 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the four-round execution gate is displayed in blue. In addition, the MPU 102, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to the side surfaces 534A to 534C of the clune 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate. Display in white. In addition, the MPU 102 displays the angel's lines “16R for red and 4R for blue!” Present at the lower right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that each hole 533A corresponding to the red area is displayed. ~ 533C are 16-round execution gates, and each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area suggests to the player that it is a 4-round execution gate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate and the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate enter the game balls entering the clune 53E. It is possible and functions as a specific ball entry unit that controls a round game based on the entry of a game ball. In addition, the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate allow the game balls entered into the clune 53E to enter, and unlike the control of the round game by the specific entrance unit, Based on this, it functions as a non-specific ball entry unit that controls the round game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the non-specific ball entering portion is set so as not to shift the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball, and the specific ball entering portion is The non-electric accessory 51 is set to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball.
Further, in the present embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate execute the payout of the game balls based on the entry of the game balls. In the present embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate execute the payout of the game balls based on the entry of the game balls, but the payout of the game balls may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes the re-lottery for selecting four round games and 16 round games when the game ball enters the non-specific entrance section, thereby performing the specific entry. 4 round games and 16 round games to be started upon entering the game ball into the ball portion are reset.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a re-lottery for selecting a round game for four times and a round game for sixteen times when the game ball enters the non-specific ball entering section, thereby performing non-specific The ball entry unit controls the round game based on the entry of the game ball so as to be different from the control of the round game by the specific ball entry unit, but may execute a control different from the re-lottery, for example, , A special effect may be executed in the round game. In short, the non-specific ball entry unit may control the round game based on the ball entry of the game ball, differently from the control of the round game by the specific ball entry unit.

According to the present embodiment as described above, in addition to the same actions and effects as those of the seventh embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The main control device 60 executes the re-lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game when the game ball enters the non-specific ball entering part, thereby entering the specific ball entering part. Since the first specific game and the second specific game that are started upon entering the game ball are reset, the player inserts the game ball into the non-specific ball entering section, so that the first specific game and The result of the lottery for selecting the second specific game can be changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the non-specific ball entering section is set so as not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball, and the specific ball entering section is Although it is set to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, it may be set in the opposite relationship. Specifically, the specific ball entering portion is set so as not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball, and the non-specific ball entering portion is the game ball. The non-electric accessory 51 may be set to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the ball.
According to this, the non-specific ball entering portion shifts the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so that the player then moves the non-electrical accessory 51 to the game ball. By entering the ball, the round game can be started without entering the game ball into the specific ball entering portion. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

[Modifications of Embodiments]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, etc. within a range in which the object of the present invention can be achieved are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may execute opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state, a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or a game to the special winning opening 38a. When the total winning number of balls reaches the predetermined upper limit number, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number of eight. As a result, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with different upper limit numbers according to the distribution result. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with different upper limit numbers for each round in one open / close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state, and the total winning number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 includes an end trigger opening that sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a game ball, and this end trigger is set when a predetermined time elapses. It may be configured to allow entry into the mouth.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state and then opens the open / close door 38b again after a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. Was set to. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state, the open / close door 38b is opened by a predetermined time period from when the winning of the special winning opening 38a occurs. The closed state may be set again.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state and then sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the open / close door 38b again after setting the open / close door 38b in the open state.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is set shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and is n times or less (n = 1, 2, or 3) the firing cycle of the game ball. The time may be set.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 is an open / close execution mode in which a round game is executed twice with an upper limit duration of a short time mode, and an open / close execution mode in which a round game is executed four times or 16 times with an upper limit duration of a long time mode. Had a mode and. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from the above regarding the aspect of the upper limit duration time and the number of times of executing the round game. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 changes the degree of opening of the open / close door 38b such as half open or full open by changing the mode of the upper limit duration, instead of the configuration of setting a plurality of types of open / close execution modes. The configuration may be such that a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the aspect of the upper limit duration may be set so that the player sees the same aspect, but the exact upper limit duration is different.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode are set in advance so as to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode may be randomly selected and set from a plurality of types of effects without being associated with the game result, and selected by a lottery or the like from a plurality of types of effects. The selection rate may be set differently depending on the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is one of the “special miss result”, the “unspecified small round high accuracy result”, and the “explicit small round high accuracy result”. Information regarding a special symbol combination is finally determined as a stop result to be stopped and displayed on the line L, and the special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of the game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result, and make it difficult for the player to know which game result.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot generation lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot occurs. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big hit random number counter C1 in the lottery of the type of the big hit. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, that is, “special deviation result” and “normal deviation result”, and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot occurrence. The jackpot occurrence lottery is executed by comparing the hit / miss table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery related to the “special miss result”. On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in order to execute the lottery related to the “special out-of-match result”, and thus the “special out-of-match” is generated. A lottery relating to “result” may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the gaming state in which the win / loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to during the lottery for jackpot occurrence, there are two random number values that are “special outlier results”, and jackpot occurrence occurs. In the game state in which the high probability mode win / loss table is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that is the “special miss result” was one. In other words, the probability of being a "special failure result" was set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of being a "special failure result" may be set to be lower in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode, and set to be the same in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. It may have been done. In addition, the probability of being a “special deviation result” may be set to be 0 in at least one of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by setting the win / loss lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the state, a gaming state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous gaming state may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the upper working opening 36 in the first result display holding area Ra and stores the hold information related to the lower working opening 37 in the second result display portion. By storing the holding information in the holding area Rb for use, the holding information related to the upper working opening 36 and the holding information related to the lower working opening 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the upper working port 36 and the hold information related to the lower working port 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information related to the lower working port 37 for digesting game times regardless of whether or not there is the hold information related to the upper working port 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the upper operation port 36 and the hold information related to the lower operation port 37 for the game times to be consumed in the winning order of the respective hold information.

(17) In each of the above-described embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command resulting from analysis of the command to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 is controlled by the following. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits the command resulting from the analysis of the command to the voice emission control device 90, thereby performing the voice emission control. Control of the device 90 may be performed. The command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in each of the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one control device of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 causes the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 to be periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of the symbols, the effect for playing the game is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for playing the game is not limited to the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game use effect by combining and operating a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game play by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 in combination. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game play by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 47.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes the internal lottery (win / win lottery and distribution lottery) based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37, and then the main display unit 45. And the symbol display device 47 executes the variable display, and also displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 36 or the lower working opening 37 as the result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the variable display is started. The result of may be displayed. In this case, after the variable display is started and before the variable display is stopped, the internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the picture and displays the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery, or by displaying the stop result at random, The result of the lottery may not be identified. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may not include the main display unit 45.

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of the symbols, the effect for playing the game is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute the game use effect on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (a symbol) that clearly shows the result of the internal lottery.

  For example, the symbol display device 47 has a predetermined area in at least one of a narrower area than the area for displaying the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When setting and stopping the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, a symbol clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in this predetermined area may or may not be variably displayed during variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may be a character, a color, or a pattern that is difficult for the player to identify, or a combination thereof. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify by adopting characters or colors or patterns that are difficult for the player to identify, and patterns that are similar to each other, or combinations thereof, are adopted. According to this, the manager of the game hall, for example, looks at the symbol display device 47 without looking at the main display portion 45 at the end of the game time, and is the same as in the case of winning the jackpot occurrence lottery. It is possible to simply confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior is performed.

(23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, the game machine is configured so that the player can output an optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and the information of the optical code is provided on a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured so that the information of the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at, and accessing the website. In addition, the game machine is configured to receive the information of the web server by inputting the password issued by the player accessing the website to the game machine by operating the buttons etc. provided on the game machine. You may.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been described as an example of the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention, when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens the electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the game machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or another type of game machine such as a sparrow ball.

(25) In each of the above-described embodiments, the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then the clune route to guide the clune 53, and the right side. By switching between the discharge route for discharging to the outside of the variable ball entering mechanism 52, it has a function of guiding the game ball entered inside the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 to the clune route or the discharge route. On the other hand, for example, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 discharges the execution gate route that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the four round execution gate after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 inside. You may have instead of the route.

FIG. 77 is a front view of a game board according to a modified example of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 inserts the game ball flowing down the game area into the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52. After that, it was equipped with a clune route for guiding to the clune 53 and a discharge route for discharging to the outside of the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52.
On the other hand, in the present modification, the game board 31 is provided with a right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52H as shown in FIG. 77, and the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52H is a right-side variable entry of a game ball flowing down in the game area. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it has a clune route that guides the player to the clune 53 after entering the ball mechanism 52H and an execution gate route that guides the player to the four-round execution gate 524H.

FIG. 78 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
The right variable ball entry mechanism 52H has substantially the same structure as the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. Introducing part 521 to enter the inside of the, the guide passage 522 for guiding the game ball guided to the entrance of the right variable ball entering mechanism 52H by the introducing part 521, and the destination of the game ball guided in the guide passage 522 A switching unit 523 for switching between, and a four-round execution gate 524H and a guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) provided at the guide destination of the guide passage 522. The right variable ball entry mechanism 52H also includes an opening / closing valve 526 provided in the guide passage 522.

  The introduction portion 521 is a blade member 521a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the inlet formed on the right side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H, and a blade member centered on an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. A pin 521b that rotatably supports the 521a and a blade member driving unit 521c that drives the blade member 521a are provided.

The blade member 521a is rotated counterclockwise about the pin 521b to close the inlet of the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52H (one-dot chain line in the figure) and to rotate clockwise about the pin 521b. It has an open state (solid line in the figure) that opens the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H by moving (see arrow in the figure). In the open state, the blade member 521a is inclined so as to descend as it approaches the inlet side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H.
The blade member driving unit 521c drives the blade member 521a to set the blade member 521a to either the closed state or the open state.

In the present modification, the blade member 521a allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each of the operation ports 36 and 37. Specifically, the blade member 521a is set to the open state when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. Further, the blade member 521a is set to the closed state when the internal lottery does not win the shift to the open / close execution mode.
It should be noted that the introduction portion 521 may be configured so as to allow a game ball flowing down in the game area to enter the inside of the right side variable ball input mechanism 52H, the opening / closing timing of the blade member 521a, and the opening / closing of the blade member 521a. The cycle can be set arbitrarily.

Therefore, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball travels through the blade member 521a using the inclination of the blade member 521a and enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H. Yes (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to the closed state, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H (one-dot chain line in the figure).

As described above, in the present modified example, the respective operation ports 36, 37 allow the game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and function as a lottery entry ball means for executing an internal lottery when entering the game balls.
Further, in the present modification, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H can enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery entry ball means. It functions as a variable ball entry means.
In addition, in this modification, the respective operation ports 36 and 37 are adopted as the lottery entry means, but the through gate 41 may be adopted as the lottery entry means, or another entry means may be adopted. Good. In short, the lottery entry ball means only needs to be able to enter the game ball flowing down the game area and execute the internal lottery when entering the game ball.

The guide passage 522 is formed in a width such that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the passage at the same time. In addition, the guide passage 522 is bifurcated midway, and has an upstream guide passage 522a located upstream of the branch and two downstream guide passages 522b and 522c located downstream. .
The guide passage 522 is formed transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the inside can be viewed from the front side.

  The upstream guide passage 522a guides the game ball, which has been introduced into the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H at the introduction portion 521, from the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H to the branch position of the guide passage 522. The upstream guide passage 522a is inclined so as to descend from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H toward the branch position of the guide passage 522. Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a by utilizing the inclination of the upstream guide passage 522a.

The downstream guide passage 522b is provided at a position near the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream side guide passage 522b is formed along the vertically downward direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 522. The downstream guide passage 522b guides the game ball, which has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a, to the four-round execution gate 524H. The four-round execution gate 524H has the same function as the holes 533B and 533C of the clune 53, and when a ball enters the four-round execution gate 524H, the pachinko machine 10 performs four round games. Start executing.
The downstream guide passage 522c is provided at a position far from the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream guide passage 522c is formed from the branch position of the guide passage 522 to the guide rail 525 for the game ball. The downstream guide passage 522c guides the game ball, which has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a, to the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

  The switching unit 523 rotatably supports the plate 523a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522c and the plate 523a about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. The pin 523b and the plate drive part 523c which drives the plate 523a are provided.

The plate 523a rotates clockwise about the pin 523b to close the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b (two-dot chain line in the figure) and rotates counterclockwise about the pin 523b. As a result, the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522c is closed and the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b is opened (solid line in the figure). In the closed state, the plate 523a is inclined so as to descend toward the downstream guide passage 522c side.
The plate driving unit 523c drives the plate 523a to set the plate 523a to either the closed state or the open state.

Therefore, when the plate driving unit 523c sets the plate 523a to the open state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b and then the four-round execution gate. You will be guided to 524H (solid line in the figure). After that, the game ball enters the 4-round execution gate 524H (execution gate route).
On the other hand, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state by the plate drive unit 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 travels down the plate 523a by utilizing the inclination of the plate 523a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 522c, it is guided to the guide rail 525 (two-dot chain line in the figure). After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) (clune route).

  Here, the plate 523a is normally set to an open state (execution gate route) in which the game ball is not guided to the klune 53. Then, in the internal lottery, when winning the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, and shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the plate 523a is set to the closed state (the clune route) in which the game ball is guided to the clune 53.

The on-off valve 526 includes a valve body 526a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the upstream guide passage 522a, and an on-off valve drive unit 526b that drives the valve body 526a.
The valve body 526a is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 and is buried in the game board 31, thereby opening the game ball that has entered the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H and passing it toward the window panel 22. By advancing and projecting from the game board 31, it has a closed state in which the game ball that has entered the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H does not pass.
The on-off valve drive unit 526b drives the valve body 526a to set the valve body 526a to either the closed state or the open state.

Therefore, when the valve main body 526a is set to the open state by the opening / closing valve drive unit 526b, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a.
On the other hand, when the valve main body 526a is set to the closed state by the opening / closing valve drive unit 526b, the game ball is stopped in the middle of the upstream guide passage 522a in the valve main body 526a and enters the standby state ( (Solid line in the figure).

  Here, when the upstream guide passage 522a is stationary in the middle of the upstream guide passage 522a in the valve main body 526a and is in a standby state (when one game ball is stationary in the valve main body 526a), A discharge port 522a1 for discharging the subsequent game ball that has entered the right variable ball input mechanism 52H, and a discharge passage for discharging the game ball that has entered the discharge port 522a1 to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 77). And 522a2.

The discharge port 522a1 is formed on the game board 31 at a distance of one game ball from the valve body 526a of the on-off valve 526 toward the blade member 521a side of the introduction portion 521. When the valve main body 526a stands still in the middle of the upstream guide passage 522a and enters the standby state, the subsequent game ball that has entered the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H comes into contact with the standby game ball. Then, the ball enters the discharge port 522a1.
The upstream guide passage 522a may have an inclined surface that is slightly inclined toward the discharge port 522a1 in order to make it easier for the game ball to enter the discharge port 522a1.

As shown in FIG. 77, the discharge passage 522a2 merges with the discharge passage 536 of the clune 53 above the opening 311 and discharges the game ball into the game area through the opening 311.
In this way, the opening / closing valve 526 is configured so that the valve body 526a does not stop two or more game balls.

As described above, in the present modification, the on-off valve 526 has an open state in which the game ball that has entered the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52H is passed and a closed state in which it is not passed, and switches between the open state and the closed state. There is.
In this modification, the plate 523a has a first route (execution gate route) that guides the game ball that has passed through the on-off valve 526 to the downstream guide passage 522b (first flow passage), and the downstream guide passage. 522b and a second route (Krune route) that guides to a downstream guide passage 522c (second flow path), and functions as a route switching valve that switches between the first route and the second route. There is.

Here, the clune 53 has a hole 533A (16 round execution gate) for starting execution of 16 round games and holes 533B, 533C (4 round execution gate) for starting execution of 4 round games. Since it is provided, higher value can be given to the player as compared with the 4-round execution gate 524H. In other words, the clune route can give a higher value to the player than the execution gate route.
Therefore, in this modification, the execution gate route gives the player a predetermined value by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522b, and the clune route guides the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522c. This gives the player higher value than the execution gate route.

In this modification, the clune route gives the player a higher value than the execution gate route by increasing the number of times of executing the round game, but for example, increasing the payout of the game ball, The player may be given a higher value than the execution gate route by executing a special effect.
In short, the second route may give a higher value to the player than the first route by guiding the game balls to the second flow path.

  In addition, the clune 53 is provided on the rolling surface 531 and the rolling surface 531 that rolls the gaming ball that has entered the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H, and also enters the gaming ball that rolls on the rolling surface 531. Since each of the holes 533A to 533C is provided, the execution gate route adds value to the player over a predetermined time by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522b, and the clune route is By guiding the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522c, the player is given value over a longer time than the execution gate route.

In this modification, the clune route gives the player more time than the execution gate route by guiding the game ball to the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53, but, for example, The value may be given to the player over a longer time than the execution gate route by guiding the game ball to a different accessory or by executing a special effect.
In short, the second route may give the player more time than the first route by guiding the game ball to the second flow path.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a timing chart of opening / closing of the blade member, the valve body, and the plate when the opening / closing execution mode is entered. Specifically, FIG. 79 (A) is a timing chart in the case where the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and FIG. 79 (B) is an odd number having the same stop result. It is a timing chart when it becomes a combination of symbols having.
As described above, the blade member 521a is set to the open state when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery.

  The blade member 521a wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the stop result is the combination of the symbols having the same even number, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the opening / closing execution is performed. After the shift to the mode, when 10 seconds have passed, the open state and the closed state are repeatedly set in a predetermined cycle. In other words, the blade member 521a intermittently opens and closes at a predetermined cycle.

  Further, when the blade member 521a wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery and the stop result is the combination of the symbols having the same odd number, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), After the shift to the open / close execution mode, when 15 seconds have passed, the open state and the closed state are repeatedly set in a predetermined cycle. In other words, the blade member 521a intermittently opens and closes at a predetermined cycle.

In this modification, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to a closed state for 1 sec and an open state for 0.5 sec. Further, the blade member 521a is installed in an open state three times in total. Therefore, the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed in a cycle of 1.5 sec, and the period from the start of the first open state to the end of the third open state is 3.5 sec.
In addition, in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “Aim for the crune by right-handing!” In the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to play the game. Suggests that the person is right-handed.

Further, the valve main body 526a is set to the open state of 0.5 sec when 15 sec and 25 sec have passed after the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, the open / close valve 526 is set to the open state for 0.5 sec twice after the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode.
Then, the plate 523a is set to the closed state for 10 seconds when 20 seconds have passed after the shift to the open / close execution mode.

  In the internal lottery, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won, and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the MPU 62 switches to the execution gate entry possible state. In the execution gate ball entry possible state, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to the open state and the closed state at a predetermined cycle when 10 seconds have elapsed after shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H via the open blade member 521a reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 when the valve body 526a is opened for the first time, and the open plate 523a. After being guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b at, the vehicle is guided to the four-round execution gate 524H. After that, the game ball enters the 4-round execution gate 524H (execution gate route).

  On the other hand, in the internal lottery, when winning the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the MPU 62 switches to the clune entry possible state. In the clune entry possible state, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to the open state and the closed state at a predetermined cycle when 15 seconds have passed after the shift to the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H through the open blade member 521a reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 when the valve body 526a is opened for the second time, and then reaches the closed plate 523a. After being guided to the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522c, the guide rail 525 is guided. After that, the game ball is guided to the clune 53 via the guide rail 525 (clune route).

  In this modified example, in the execution gate ball entry possible state or the clune ball entry possible state, when the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H via the open blade member 521a, the MPU62 Although the game in the open / close execution mode is ended and a normal state is entered, for example, the timing chart shown in FIG. 79 (A) may be repeated, or other timing charts may be repeated. .

As described above, in the present modification, the MPU 62, based on the result (stop result) of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each of the operation ports 36 and 37, the execution gate entry possible state and the clune It functions as a possible entry state switching means for switching the possible entry state.
In this modified example, the MPU 62 switches between the execution gate entry possible state and the clune entry possible state based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each of the operating ports 36 and 37. However, for example, the execution gate entry possible state and the clune entry possible state may be switched based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the through gate 41. The execution gate entry possible state and the clune entry possible state may be switched based on the open state of the object 51, and the execution gate entry possible state and the clune entry possible state may be switched based on other information. Good.
In short, the ball entry possible state switching means may switch between the execution gate entry possible state and the clune entry possible state.

Further, in the present modification, the MPU 62 sets a game ball that flows down in the game area so as to be able to enter so as to pass through the opening / closing valve 526 while being switched to the execution gate route by the plate 523a. Allowable state (first enterable state) and tune in to set enterable game balls flowing down the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve 526 when switched to the clune route by the plate 523a. The ball is switched to a ball-ready state (second ball-enterable state).
In addition, in the present modification, the MPU 62 switches between the first enterable state and the second enterable state based on the timing chart shown in FIG. 79, but the first enterable state is possible. A timing chart other than this may be adopted as long as the state and the second ball entry possible state can be switched.

According to this modification, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The MPU 62 switches the execution gate entry possible state and the clune entry possible state so that the execution gate entry possible state passes through the on-off valve 526 when the plate 523a is switched to the execution gate route. A game ball that flows down into the game area is set to be enterable, and the playable state in which the player can enter the clune is such that the game ball flows down the gaming area so as to pass through the on-off valve 526 when being switched to the clune route by the plate 523a. The ball is set to enter. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the timing of switching the open / close valve 526 to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) Since the MPU 62 switches the execution gate entry possible state and the clune entry possible state based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each of the operating ports 36, 37, the player Pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each of the operating ports 36 and 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(3) Since the clune route gives the player a higher value than the execution gate route by guiding the gaming ball to the downstream guide passage 522c, the player can switch to the clune entry possible state with the MPU 62. You will expect that. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The execution gate route gives value to the player over a predetermined time by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522b, and the clune route guides the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522c. As a result, the player is given value over a longer time than the execution gate route. Therefore, when the player switches to the execution gate route on the plate 523a, the player can proceed to the next game with a refreshing feeling. If you switch to the clune route, you can fully enjoy the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(5) The clune route guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 of the clune 53 by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522c. Value can be added, and the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52H. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments will be described below. Incidentally, among the features of the present invention group, the corresponding configurations in the respective embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the respective embodiments, and Modifications, improvements, etc. within a range where the object can be achieved, and combinations of the respective features are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Feature A group>
Features A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the advantageous identification for the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entering means (non-electric accessory 51), which moves to
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the variable ball entry means (clune 53) that allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter ,
The variable ball entering means,
A first ball-in portion (holes 533B, 533C) that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means to enter, and does not shift the opening / closing ball-in means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball. )When,
A second ball entry portion (hole 533A) that allows the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means to enter, and moves the opening / closing entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. Equipped with
The game state transition means,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, the specific control state upon entering the game ball into any of the opening / closing entrance means, the first entrance part, and the second entrance part A gaming machine comprising specific control starting means (gaming state transition processing) for starting the game.

  According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine can enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Since the variable ball entering means is provided with the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section for starting the game in the specific control state when entering the game ball, the player can , After starting the game state transition to the specific control state by the game state transition means, to start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the first ball entering portion or the second ball entering portion You can In addition, the second ball entering portion moves the opening / closing ball means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball, so that the player controls the game state by the game state transition means to the next specific control. After shifting to the state, the game ball in the specific control state can be started by inserting the game ball into the opening / closing entrance means. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The game in the specific control state, which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part, is specified when the game ball enters the first entrance part. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a controlled game.

  According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part is the entry of the game ball into the first entrance part. In order to give the player a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, when the player enters the game ball in the variable ball entering means to start the game in the specific control state, , Expecting to enter the second entrance portion. Further, when the opening / closing entrance means is shifted from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the second entrance portion, the player sets the game state to the next by the game state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, by entering the game ball into the opening / closing entrance means, a higher value than the game in the specific control state which is started when the game ball enters the first ball entering part is played. It is possible to start the game in the specific control state given to the person. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the first ball entering portion, and the opening / closing entrance means and the second By starting the game in the specific control state where more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the ball entering part, A gaming machine, which gives a player a higher value than a game in the specific control state which is started upon entering a ball.

  According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry portion can start the game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the opening / closing entry means and The entry of the game ball into the second entry part is started by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, thereby entering the first entry ball. Since a higher value is given to the player than the game in the specific control state which is started upon entering the ball, the player, when starting the game in the specific control state, enters the second ball into the ball entering section. You will expect it. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A3 of the present invention group,
An open / closed ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball is entered. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means,
After the opening / closing ball means is set to the open state, it is set as one game (round game) in the specific control state until the closed state is set again, and the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing ball means is set to a predetermined number. By starting a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and setting the number of times of opening and closing the opening and closing means to a number larger than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of game balls A game machine characterized by starting a game in the specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out.

  According to the characteristic A4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets a predetermined number of games by setting the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. Start a game in a specific control state in which the ball can be paid out, and set the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing entrance means to a number greater than a predetermined number when entering the game ball into the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part. By doing so, since the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, when the player starts the game in the specific control state, the player moves to the second ball entry section. You will be expected to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A4 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
A klune (clue 53) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means,
A game machine characterized in that the first ball-in part and the second ball-in part are provided on the rolling surface and allow a game ball rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

  According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, since the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface of the clune, the player has entered the game into the variable ball entry means. We will pay attention to the whereabouts of the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A5 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing entrance means,
A first receiving portion (each plate-shaped member 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening / closing ball means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball-in portion;
When the game ball is received by the first receiving portion, the open state is changed to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball by the second receiving portion, the closed state is changed to the open state. And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the opening / closing ball means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. As a result, the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that it is possible to shift the open / closed state using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Features A7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged in the first path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic A7 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the first path, the player shifts the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not transferred to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening / closing entrance means via the first path. In this case, the opening / closing entrance means will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player shifts the game state to the specific control state before executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. You can play the game in the hope that you will.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged on a third path (weak hitting path) different from the first path and the second path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic A8 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the third path, the player moves the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not inserted into the opening / closing entry means. In this case, the opening / closing means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  According to the feature A group of the present invention as described above, it is possible to broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game. Therefore, the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is provided by providing a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball entering the actuation opening (starting entry means). A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, it shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the action of the player is interposed after shifting the game state to the specific control state, There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the advantageous identification for the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entering means (non-electric accessory 51), which moves to
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the variable ball entering means (the clune 53A and the first clune) which allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter. 55) and
The variable ball entering means,
A ball entering portion (each hole 533A to 533C, 553A, 553B) into which the game ball entered the variable ball entering means is inserted,
An opening / closing lottery means (rotating body 537, a saucer 538, and a second clune 56) for performing a lottery on the opening / closing entrance means based on the entry of the game balls into the entrance portion is provided.
The game state transition means,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, the specific control start means for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the opening / closing entry means or the entry part (game state) A game machine characterized by having a transition process).

  According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine can enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Since the variable ball entering means is provided with a ball entering portion for starting a game in a specific control state when entering a game ball, the player changes the game state by the game state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, by entering the game ball into the ball entering portion, the game in the specific control state can be started. Further, since the variable ball entry means is provided with an open / close lottery means for performing a lottery on the open / close entry means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part, for example, in the lottery executed by the open / close lottery means. When the player wins and the opening / closing entrance means is changed from the closed state to the opening state, the player moves to the opening / closing entrance means after the game state is changed to the next specific control state by the game state transition means. By entering a game ball, it is possible to start a game in a specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
A plurality of ball entrances including a first ball entrance (holes 533B, 533C, 553B) and a second ball entrance (holes 533A, 553A);
The game in the specific control state, which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part, is specified when the game ball enters the first entrance part. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a controlled game.

  According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part is the entry of the game ball into the first entrance part. In order to give the player a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, when the player enters the game ball in the variable ball entering means to start the game in the specific control state, , Expecting to enter the second entrance portion. Further, when the player selects a lottery executed by the opening / closing lottery means and shifts the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state, the player specifies the next game state by the game state transition means. After shifting to the control state, by entering the game ball into the opening / closing entrance means, the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state, which is started when the game ball enters the first entrance portion. It is possible to start the game of the specific control state to be given. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B2 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the first ball entering portion, and the opening / closing entrance means and the second By starting the game in the specific control state where more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the ball entering part, A gaming machine, which gives a player a higher value than a game in the specific control state which is started upon entering a ball.

  According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion can start the game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the opening / closing entry means and The entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion is started by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Since a higher value is given to the player than the game in the specific control state which is started at the time of entering the ball, when the player starts the game in the specific control state, the player is allowed to enter the second ball entering section. You will expect it. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
An open / closed ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball is entered. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means,
After the opening / closing ball means is set to the open state, it is set as one game (round game) in the specific control state until the closed state is set again, and the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing ball means is set to a predetermined number. By starting a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and setting the number of times of opening and closing the opening and closing means to a number larger than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of game balls A game machine characterized by starting a game in the specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out.

  According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets a predetermined number of games by setting the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. Start a game in a specific control state in which the ball can be paid out, and set the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing entrance means to a number larger than a predetermined number when entering the game ball into the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part. As a result, the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and therefore, when the player starts the game in the specific control state, the player enters the second ball entering section. You will be expected to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B4 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
A klune having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means (the klune 53A and the first klune 55),
A game machine characterized in that the plurality of ball-in portions are provided on the rolling surface and into which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface is inserted.

  According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, since the plurality of ball entrance portions are provided on the rolling surface of the clune, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball entered in the variable ball entrance means. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B5 of the present invention group,
The rolling surface is
Formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface and provided with the plurality of ball-in portions provided at equal intervals.
The opening / closing lottery means,
While rotating about an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface as a central axis, a rotating body (rotating body 537) for inserting the game balls entered in the plurality of entering balls is provided.
The rotating body is
A plurality of rotating body passages (rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3) that are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of entering ball portions and that guide the game balls that have entered the plurality of entering ball portions,
The plurality of rotor passages,
A first rotating body passage (rotating body passages 537C2, 537C3) that does not shift the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state based on the entering of the game ball,
A game machine comprising: a second rotating body passage (rotating body passage 537C1) that shifts the opening / closing entrance means from a closed state to an open state based on the entering of a game ball.

  According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the opening / closing lottery means includes a rotating body that rotates about an axis that passes through the center of the rolling surface as a central axis and that receives game balls that have entered the plurality of ball-in portions. The rotating body has a first rotating body passage which does not shift the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open status based on the entry of the game ball, and the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. And a second rotary body passage for shifting to. According to this, the opening and closing lottery means can independently open and close the opening and closing ball entrance means without being affected by the clune having a plurality of ball entrance parts that start the game in the specific control state when entering the game ball. It is possible to draw by lot whether or not to shift to the open state. Further, when the opening / closing ball entering means is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game balls entering the plurality of ball entering parts into the second rotating body passage of the rotating body, the game When the player enters the game ball into the first ball entrance portion by entering the game ball into the opening / closing entrance means after the game state is transferred to the next specific control state by the game status transition means. It is possible to start the game in the specific control state in which the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state to be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B5 of the present invention group,
The opening / closing lottery means,
A lottery clune (second clune 56) having a lottery rolling surface (rolling surface 561) for rolling the game balls that have entered the first and second ball entering portions,
The lottery clune is
While being provided on the lottery rolling surface, a plurality of lottery entry portions (each hole 563A to 563C) for entering game balls rolling on the lottery rolling surface are provided,
The plurality of lottery entrance portions,
A first lottery entry ball portion (each hole 563B, 563C) that does not shift the opening / closing entry ball means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball,
A gaming machine comprising: a second lottery ball portion (hole 563A) that shifts the opening / closing ball means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball.

  According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the opening / closing lottery means does not shift the opening / closing entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball. The lottery clune is provided with a second lottery entry ball portion that shifts the opening / closing entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball. According to this, the open / close lottery means is independent without being influenced by the clune equipped with the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section that starts the game in the specific control state when entering the game ball. Whether or not the opening / closing ball means is to be moved from the closed state to the open state can be drawn by lottery. In addition, the game balls that have entered the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are inserted into the second lottery ball entering portion, so that the opening / closing ball means is changed from the closed state to the open state. In such a case, the player shifts the game state to the next specific control state by the game state shifting means, and then enters the game ball into the opening / closing ball entering means to enter the first ball entering portion. It is possible to start the game in the specific control state in which the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball is entered. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B7 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing entrance means,
A first receiving portion (each plate-shaped member 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening / closing ball means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball-in portion;
When the game ball is received by the first receiving portion, the open state is changed to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball by the second receiving portion, the closed state is changed to the open state. And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the opening / closing ball means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. As a result, the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that it is possible to shift the open / closed state by using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged in the first path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the first path, the player shifts the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not transferred to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening / closing entrance means via the first path. In this case, the opening / closing entrance means will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player shifts the game state to the specific control state before executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. You can play the game in the hope that you will.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged on a third path (weak hitting path) different from the first path and the second path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature B10 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the third path, the player moves the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not inserted into the opening / closing entry means. In this case, the opening / closing means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  According to the feature B group of the present invention as described above, since the choices of the player can be expanded and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is provided by providing a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball entering the actuation opening (starting entry means). A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, it shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the action of the player is interposed after shifting the game state to the specific control state, There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the advantageous identification for the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entering means (non-electric accessory 51), which moves to
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means, the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and the opening and closing entry ball based on the entry of the game ball. A variable ball entering means (clune 53C) for shifting the means from a closed state to an open state,
The game state transition means,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means and the variable ball means. ) Is provided with a gaming machine.

  According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine can enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The variable ball entering means is provided, and the variable ball entering means starts the game in the specific control state when entering the game ball. Therefore, after the player shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means. By entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the game in the specific control state can be started. Further, when the opening / closing ball entering means is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the player sets the game state to the next state by the game state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game ball in the specific control state can be started by inserting a game ball into the opening / closing ball means. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
The first ball entering portion (each hole 533B, 533C) and the second ball entering portion (hole 533A) for entering the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means,
The game state transition means starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion,
The game in the specific control state, which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part, is specified when the game ball enters the first entrance part. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a controlled game.

  According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part is the entry of the game ball into the first entrance part. In order to give the player a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, when the player enters the game ball in the variable ball entering means to start the game in the specific control state, , Expecting to enter the second entrance portion. Further, when the opening / closing ball entering means is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the player sets the game state to the next state by the game state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, by entering the game ball into the opening / closing entrance means, a higher value than the game in the specific control state which is started at the time of entering the game ball into the first entrance portion is provided. It is possible to start the game of the specific control state given to. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C2 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the first ball entering portion, and the opening / closing entrance means and the second By starting the game in the specific control state where more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the ball entering part, A gaming machine, which gives a player a higher value than a game in the specific control state which is started upon entering a ball.

  According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion can start the game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the opening / closing entry means and The entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion is started by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Since a higher value is given to the player than the game in the specific control state which is started at the time of entering the ball, when the player starts the game in the specific control state, the player is allowed to enter the second ball entering section. You will expect it. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C3 of the present invention group,
An open / closed ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball is entered. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means,
After the opening / closing ball means is set to the open state, it is set as one game (round game) in the specific control state until the closed state is set again, and the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing ball means is set to a predetermined number. By starting a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and setting the number of times of opening and closing the opening and closing means to a number larger than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of game balls A game machine characterized by starting a game in the specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out.

  According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets a predetermined number of games by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the game opening / closing means to a predetermined number when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. Start a game in a specific control state in which the ball can be paid out, and set the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing entrance means to a number larger than a predetermined number when entering the game ball into the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part. As a result, the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and therefore, when the player starts the game in the specific control state, the player enters the second ball entering section. You will be expected to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C2 to C4 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
A klune (clue 53C) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means,
A game machine characterized in that the first ball-in part and the second ball-in part are provided on the rolling surface and allow a game ball rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

  According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, since the first ball entrance portion and the second ball entrance portion are provided on the rolling surface of the clune, the player has entered the game into the variable ball entrance means. We will pay attention to the whereabouts of the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C5 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing entrance means,
A first receiving portion (each plate-shaped member 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening / closing ball means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball-in portion;
When the game ball is received by the first receiving portion, the open state is changed to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball by the second receiving portion, the closed state is changed to the open state. And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the opening / closing ball means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. As a result, the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that it is possible to shift the open / closed state by using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged in the first path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs an internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the first path, the player shifts the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not transferred to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening / closing entrance means via the first path. In this case, the opening / closing entrance means will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player shifts the game state to the specific control state before executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. You can play the game in the hope that you will.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged on a third path (weak hitting path) different from the first path and the second path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic C8 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the third path, the player moves the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not inserted into the opening / closing entry means. In this case, the opening / closing means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  According to the feature C group of the present invention as described above, it is possible to widen the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game. Therefore, the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is provided by providing a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball entering the actuation opening (starting entry means). A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, it shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the action of the player is interposed after shifting the game state to the specific control state, There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the advantageous identification for the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Open / close ball entry means (non-electric accessory 57)
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means, the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and the opening and closing entry ball based on the entry of the game ball. A variable ball entry means (clune 53D) for shifting the means from the closed state to the open state,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged on a third path (weak hitting path) different from the first path and the second path,
The game state transition means,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means and the variable ball means. ) Is provided with a gaming machine.

  According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine can enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The variable ball entering means is provided, and the variable ball entering means starts the game in the specific control state when entering the game ball. Therefore, after the player shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means. By entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the game in the specific control state can be started. Further, when the opening / closing ball entering means is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the player sets the game state to the next state by the game state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game ball in the specific control state can be started by inserting a game ball into the opening / closing ball means. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game. Further, since the opening / closing entrance means is arranged on the third path, the player opens and closes by launching the game ball on a path different from the case where the starting entrance means enters the game ball. A game ball can be inserted into the ball means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player and allow the player to comfortably play the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, since the opening / closing ball means is arranged in the third path, the player has to perform the internal lottery a predetermined number of times after shifting the opening / closing ball means from the closed state to the open state. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not inserted into the opening / closing entry means. Therefore, since the opening / closing entrance means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 or the feature D2 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
The first ball entering portion (each hole 533B, 533C) and the second ball entering portion (hole 533A) for entering the game ball entered in the variable ball entering means,
The specific control start means starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball enters the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion,
The game in the specific control state, which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part, is specified when the game ball enters the first entrance part. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a controlled game.

  According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part is the entry of the game ball into the first entrance part. In order to give the player a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, when the player enters the game ball in the variable ball entering means to start the game in the specific control state, , Expecting to enter the second entrance portion. Further, when the opening / closing ball entering means is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the player sets the game state to the next state by the game state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, by entering the game ball into the opening / closing entrance means, a higher value than the game in the specific control state which is started at the time of entering the game ball into the first entrance portion is provided. It is possible to start the game of the specific control state given to. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D3 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the first ball entering portion, and the opening / closing entrance means and the second By starting the game in the specific control state where more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the ball entering part, A gaming machine, which gives a player a higher value than a game in the specific control state which is started upon entering a ball.

  According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the entering of the game ball into the second ball entering portion can start the game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the opening / closing entrance means and The entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion is started by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Since a higher value is given to the player than the game in the specific control state which is started at the time of entering the ball, when the player starts the game in the specific control state, the player is allowed to enter the second ball entering section. You will expect it. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D4 of the present invention group,
An open / closed ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball is entered. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means,
After the opening / closing ball means is set to the open state, it is set as one game (round game) in the specific control state until the closed state is set again, and the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing ball means is set to a predetermined number. By starting a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and setting the number of times of opening and closing the opening and closing means to a number larger than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of game balls A game machine characterized by starting a game in the specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out.

  According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets a predetermined number of games by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the game opening / closing means to a predetermined number when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. Start a game in a specific control state in which the ball can be paid out, and set the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing entrance means to a number larger than a predetermined number when entering the game ball into the opening / closing entrance means and the second entrance part. As a result, the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and therefore, when the player starts the game in the specific control state, the player enters the second ball entering section. You will be expected to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D3 to D5 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
A klune (cluen 53D) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means,
A game machine characterized in that the first ball-in part and the second ball-in part are provided on the rolling surface and allow a game ball rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

  According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, since the first ball entrance portion and the second ball entrance portion are provided on the rolling surface of the clune, the player has entered the game into the variable ball entrance means. We will pay attention to the whereabouts of the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D8 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing entrance means,
A first receiving portion (each blade member 571) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening / closing ball means;
And a second receiving portion (second arm portion 576C) for receiving the game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion,
When the game ball is received by the first receiving portion, the open state is changed to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball by the second receiving portion, the closed state is changed to the open state. And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, the opening / closing ball means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. As a result, the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that it is possible to shift the open / closed state by using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

  According to the feature D group of the present invention as described above, since the choices of the player can be expanded and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is provided by providing a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball entering the actuation opening (starting entry means). A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, it shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the action of the player is interposed after shifting the game state to the specific control state, There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the advantageous identification for the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entering means (non-electric accessory 51), which moves to
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry means (clue 53E) capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area is provided. ,
The variable ball entering means,
A first ball-in portion (holes 533B, 533C) that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means to enter, and does not shift the opening / closing ball-in means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball. )When,
A second ball entry portion (hole 533A) that allows the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means to enter, and moves the opening / closing entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. Equipped with
The game state transition means,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, the specific control state upon entering the game ball into any of the opening / closing entrance means, the first entrance portion, and the second entrance portion. Equipped with specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting the game of
The game of the specific control state,
The first specific game (4 round games),
And a second specific game (16 round games) for giving a higher value to the player than the first specific game,
The specific control start means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. A gaming machine characterized by.

  According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine can enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Since the variable ball entering means is provided with the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section for starting the game in the specific control state when entering the game ball, the player can , After starting the game state in the specific control state by the game state transition means, by starting the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball in the first ball entering section or the second ball entering section You can In addition, the second ball entering portion moves the opening / closing ball means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball, so that the player controls the game state by the game state transition means to the next specific control. After shifting to the state, the game ball in the specific control state can be started by inserting the game ball into the opening / closing entrance means. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

  Further, the game in the specific control state comprises a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the specific control starting means is the first input game. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started upon entering the game ball into the ball section and the second ball entering section, the player enters the game ball into the variable ball entering means. By doing so, when the game in the specific control state is started, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that the game in the specific control state which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means is the second specific game.

  According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, since the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means is the second specific game, the game ball to the second ball entering portion. When the opening / closing ball entering means is moved from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entry, the player opens and closes the opening / closing ball after moving the game state to the next specific control state by the game state transition means. By inserting the game ball into the means, it is possible to start the second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. In addition, when the player enters the game ball in the variable ball entering means to start the game in the specific control state, the player expects the game ball to enter the second ball entering part, We expect to start the 2 specific games. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 or the feature E2 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, whereby the game ball to the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion A game machine characterized by setting the first specific game and the second specific game to be started upon entering a ball.

  According to the characteristic E3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means executes the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, whereby the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. Since the first specific game and the second specific game to be started upon entering the game ball into the game are set, the player pays attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E3 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A gaming machine characterized by.

  According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second special ball in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Since the specific game is started, the player expects to start the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E4 of the present invention group,
An open / closed ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball is entered. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means,
After the opening / closing ball means is set to the open state, it is set as one game (round game) in the specific control state until the closed state is set again, and the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing ball means is set to a predetermined number. By starting the first specific game in which the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing ball means to be larger than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of games A game machine characterized by starting the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than balls.

  According to the feature E5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing entrance means to a predetermined number of times, and opening / closing By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the ball entry means to a number larger than a predetermined number of times, a second specific game in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, so that the player performs the specific control. When starting the game in the state, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E5 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
A klune (clue 53E) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means,
A game machine characterized in that the first ball-in part and the second ball-in part are provided on the rolling surface and allow a game ball rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

  According to the feature E6 of the present invention group, since the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface of the clune, the player has entered the game into the variable ball entry means. We will pay attention to the whereabouts of the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E6 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing entrance means,
A first receiving portion (each plate-shaped member 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening / closing ball means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball-in portion;
When the game ball is received by the first receiving portion, the open state is changed to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball by the second receiving portion, the closed state is changed to the open state. And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature E7 of the present invention group, the opening / closing ball means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. As a result, the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that it is possible to shift the open / closed state by using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E7 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged in the first path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature E8 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the first path, the player shifts the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not transferred to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening / closing entrance means via the first path. In this case, the opening / closing entrance means will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player shifts the game state to the specific control state before executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. You can play the game in the hope that you will.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E7 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged on a third path (weak hitting path) different from the first path and the second path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature E9 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the third path, the player moves the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not inserted into the opening / closing entry means. In this case, the opening / closing means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  According to the characteristic E group of the present invention as described above, since the options of the player can be expanded and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is provided by providing a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball entering the actuation opening (starting entry means). A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, it shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the action of the player is interposed after shifting the game state to the specific control state, There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the advantageous identification for the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entering means (non-electric accessory 51), which moves to
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the variable ball entering means (the clune 53A and the first clune) which allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter. 55) and
The variable ball entering means,
A ball entering portion (each hole 533A to 533C, 553A, 553B) into which the game ball entered the variable ball entering means is inserted,
An opening / closing lottery means (rotating body 537, a saucer 538, and a second clune 56) for performing a lottery on the opening / closing entrance means based on the entry of the game balls into the entrance portion is provided.
The game state transition means,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, a specific control start means (game state) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means or the ball portion. Migration process),
The game of the specific control state,
The first specific game (4 round games),
And a second specific game (16 round games) for giving a higher value to the player than the first specific game,
The specific control start means starts one of the first specific game and the second specific game when a game ball enters the ball entering portion.

  According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine can enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Since the variable ball entering means is provided with a ball entering portion for starting a game in a specific control state when entering a game ball, the player changes the game state by the game state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, by entering the game ball into the ball entering portion, the game in the specific control state can be started. Further, since the variable ball entry means is provided with an open / close lottery means for performing a lottery on the open / close entry means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part, for example, in the lottery executed by the open / close lottery means. When the player wins and the opening / closing entrance means is changed from the closed state to the opening state, the player moves to the opening / closing entrance means after the game state is changed to the next specific control state by the game state transition means. By entering a game ball, it is possible to start a game in a specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

  Further, the game in the specific control state comprises a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the specific control starting means is to enter the ball entering portion. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started at the time of entering the game ball, the player enters the game ball in the specific control state by causing the variable ball entering means to enter the game ball. When starting, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F2.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the advantageous identification for the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entering means (non-electric accessory 51), which moves to
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means, the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and the opening and closing entry ball based on the entry of the game ball. A variable ball entering means (clune 53C) for shifting the means from a closed state to an open state,
The game state transition means,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means and the variable ball means. ),
The game of the specific control state,
The first specific game (4 round games),
And a second specific game (16 round games) for giving a higher value to the player than the first specific game,
A game machine characterized in that the specific control starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when a game ball enters the variable ball entering means.

  According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the gaming machine can enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The variable ball entering means is provided, and the variable ball entering means starts the game in the specific control state when entering the game ball. Therefore, after the player shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means. By entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the game in the specific control state can be started. Further, when the opening / closing ball entering means is moved from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the player sets the game state to the next state by the game state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game ball in the specific control state can be started by inserting a game ball into the opening / closing ball means. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

  Further, the game in the specific control state comprises a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the specific control starting means is a variable ball entering means. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters the game ball, the player enters the game ball into the variable ball entering means to enter the game in the specific control state. When starting, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 or the feature F2 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that the game in the specific control state which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means is the second specific game.

  According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, since the game in the specific control state which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means is the second specific game, the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. When the opening / closing ball entering means is moved from the closed state to the opening state based on the ball, the player moves to the opening / closing ball entering means after the game state is transferred to the next specific control state by the game state transferring means. By entering the game ball, it is possible to start the second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. In addition, the player expects the start of the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F1 to F3 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means executes the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby starting the first specification when the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. A game machine characterized by setting a game and the second specific game.

  According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means starts upon entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means by executing a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Since the first specific game and the second specific game to be set are set, the player pays attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F1 to F4 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A gaming machine characterized by.

  According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second specific game start in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Since the specific game is started, the player expects to start the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F5 of the present invention group,
An open / closed ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball is entered. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means,
After the opening / closing ball means is set to the open state, it is set as one game (round game) in the specific control state until the closed state is set again, and the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing ball means is set to a predetermined number. By starting the first specific game in which the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing ball means to be larger than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of games A game machine characterized by starting the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than balls.

  According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing ball means to a predetermined number of times, and opening / closing By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the ball entry means to a number larger than a predetermined number of times, a second specific game in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, so that the player performs the specific control. When starting the game in the state, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F1 to F6 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
A plurality of ball-in portions (each hole 533A to 533C, 553A, 553B) into which the game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means is inserted,
A klune having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means (clue 53A, klune 53C, and first klune 55),
A game machine characterized in that the plurality of ball-in portions are provided on the rolling surface and into which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface is inserted.

  According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, since the plurality of ball entrance portions are provided on the rolling surface of the clune, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball entered in the variable ball entrance means. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F1 to F7 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing entrance means,
A first receiving portion (each plate-shaped member 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening / closing ball means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball-in portion;
When the game ball is received by the first receiving portion, the open state is changed to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball by the second receiving portion, the closed state is changed to the open state. And a gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic F8 of the present invention group, the opening / closing ball means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. As a result, the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that it is possible to shift the open / closed state by using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F1 to E8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged in the first path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature F9 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the first path, the player shifts the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not transferred to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening / closing entrance means via the first path. In this case, the opening / closing entrance means will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player shifts the game state to the specific control state before executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. You can play the game in the hope that you will.

Feature F10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F1 to F8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged on a third path (weak hitting path) different from the first path and the second path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature F10 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the third path, the player moves the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not inserted into the opening / closing entry means. In this case, the opening / closing means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  According to such a feature F group of the present invention, it is possible to broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game. Therefore, the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is provided by providing a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball entering the actuation opening (starting entry means). A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, it shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the action of the player is interposed after shifting the game state to the specific control state, There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature G group>
Features G1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the advantageous identification for the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state to a control state,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry means (clue 53E) is provided for allowing the game ball flowing down the game area to enter.
The variable ball entering means,
A specific ball input section (round game execution gate) that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball input means to enter, and controls the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball,
It is possible to enter a game ball entered into the variable ball entering means, and a non-specific entrance part (replay gate) that does not control the game in the specific control state based on the entrance of the game ball is provided. Amusement machine.

  According to the feature G1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine can enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Since the variable ball entering means is provided with the specific ball entering portion for controlling the game in the specific control state when entering the game ball, the player can enter the game state by the game state transition means. After entering the specific control state, by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering portion, it is possible to control the game in the specific control state. Moreover, since the non-specific ball entry unit does not control the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball, the player can re-enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the non-specific ball entering portion pays out the game ball based on the ball entering the game ball.

  According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, since the non-specific ball entering portion pays out the game ball based on the ball entering the game ball, the player sets the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means. After the transition, by inserting the game ball into the non-specific ball entering portion, it is possible to increase the game ball without controlling the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G3.
In the gaming machine described in the characteristic G1 or the characteristic G2 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Equipped with opening and closing ball entering means (non-electric accessory 51)
The game state transition means,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, a specific control start means (game state shift processing) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion,
The variable ball entering means,
The non-specific ball entering section that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means to enter, and does not shift the opening and closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball,
It is possible to enter a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means, and the specific ball entering portion that shifts the opening and closing ball entering means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of the game ball. And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature G3 of the group of the present invention, the specific ball-in portion makes the opening / closing ball-in means move from the closed state to the open state based on the ball-in of the game ball. After shifting the state to the next specific control state, the game ball in the specific control state can be started by inserting the game ball into the opening / closing entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G4.
In the gaming machine described in the characteristic G1 or the characteristic G2 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Equipped with opening and closing ball entering means (non-electric accessory 51)
The game state transition means,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, a specific control start means (game state shift processing) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion,
The variable ball entering means,
The specific ball entering portion that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means to enter, and does not shift the opening and closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball,
And a non-specific ball-entering section that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means to enter, and that moves the opening-and-closing ball-in means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball. Characteristic gaming machine.

  According to the feature G4 of the present invention group, since the non-specific ball entry unit causes the opening / closing ball entry means to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, the player then opens / closes the ball entry means. By entering the game ball into, it is possible to start the game in the specific control state without entering the game ball into the specific ball-in portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group,
The game of the specific control state,
The first specific game (4 round games),
And a second specific game (16 round games) for giving a higher value to the player than the first specific game,
The specific control start means starts one of the first specific game and the second specific game when a game ball enters the specific ball entering portion.

  According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state includes the first specific game and the second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the specific control is performed. The starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section, so that the player enters the game ball into the specific ball entering section. As a result, when the game in the specific control state is started, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G5 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that the game in the specific control state which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means is the second specific game.

  According to the feature G6 of the present invention group, since the game in the specific control state which starts when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means is the second specific game, the opening / closing ball means is opened from the closed state. In the case of shifting to, the player inserts the game ball into the opening / closing ball means to start the second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G5 or the feature G6 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby starting the first specific when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion. A game machine characterized by setting a game and the second specific game.

  According to the feature G7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means starts the entry of the game ball into the specific entry part by executing a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Since the first specific game and the second specific game to be set are set, the player pays attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G5 to G7 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A gaming machine characterized by.

  According to the feature G8 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second specific game ball in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Since the specific game is started, the player expects to start the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G8 of the present invention group,
An open / closed ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball is entered. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means,
After the opening / closing ball means is set to the open state, it is set as one game (round game) in the specific control state until the closed state is set again, and the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing ball means is set to a predetermined number. By starting the first specific game in which the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing ball means to be larger than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of games A game machine characterized by starting the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than balls.

  According to the feature G9 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing entrance means to a predetermined number of times, and opening / closing By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the ball entry means to a number larger than a predetermined number of times, a second specific game in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, so that the player performs the specific control. When starting the game in the state, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G3 to G9 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing entrance means,
A first receiving portion (each plate-shaped member 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening / closing ball means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball-in portion;
When the game ball is received by the first receiving portion, the open state is changed to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball by the second receiving portion, the closed state is changed to the open state. And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature G10 of the present invention group, the opening / closing ball means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. As a result, the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that it is possible to shift the open / closed state by using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature G11.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G3 to G10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged in the first path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature G11 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the first path, the player shifts the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not transferred to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening / closing entrance means via the first path. In this case, the opening / closing entrance means will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player shifts the game state to the specific control state before executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. You can play the game in the hope that you will.

Features G12.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G3 to G10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged on a third path (weak hitting path) different from the first path and the second path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature G12 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the third path, the player moves the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not inserted into the opening / closing entry means. In this case, the opening / closing means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Features G13.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G1 to G12 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
A klune (clue 53E) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means,
The specific entry ball portion and the non-specific entry ball portion are provided on the rolling surface and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

  According to the feature G13 of the present invention group, since the specific ball-in portion and the non-specific ball-in portion are provided on the rolling surface of the clune, the player can find the whereabouts of the game ball in the variable ball-in means. Will pay attention to. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

  According to the feature group G of the present invention as described above, the options of the player can be expanded and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is provided by providing a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball entering the actuation opening (starting entry means). A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, it shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the action of the player is interposed after shifting the game state to the specific control state, There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the advantageous identification for the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state shifting means (main controller 60) for shifting a gaming state to a control state,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry means (clue 53E) is provided for allowing the game ball flowing down the game area to enter.
The variable ball entering means,
A specific ball input section (round game execution gate) that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball input means to enter, and controls the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball,
A game ball entered in the variable ball entering means can be entered, and unlike the control of the game in the particular control state by the particular ball entry part, the game in the particular control state based on the entry of the game ball And a non-specific entrance portion (replay gate) for controlling the game machine.

  According to the feature H1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine can enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Since the variable ball entering means is provided with a specific ball entering portion that executes a game in a specific control state when entering a game ball, the player can enter the game state by the game state transition means. After entering the specific control state, by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering portion, it is possible to control the game in the specific control state. Further, the non-specific ball entering unit controls the game in the specific control state based on the ball entering the game ball, differently from the control of the game in the specific control state by the specific ball entering unit. After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the transition means, by inserting the game ball into the non-specific ball entering section, the specific control is different from the control of the game in the specific control state by the specific ball entering section. The state game can be controlled. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features H2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature H1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, a specific control start means (game state shift processing) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion,
The game of the specific control state,
The first specific game (4 round games),
And a second specific game (16 round games) for giving a higher value to the player than the first specific game,
The specific control start means starts one of the first specific game and the second specific game when a game ball enters the specific ball entering portion.

  According to the feature H2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state includes the first specific game and the second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the specific control is performed. Since the starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion, the player causes the variable ball entering means to enter the game ball. As a result, when the game in the specific control state is started, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the player's attention to the game.

Features H3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature H2 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby starting the first specific when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion. By setting a game and the second specific game, by executing a re-lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game when the game ball enters the non-specific ball entering section, A game machine characterized by resetting the first specific game and the second specific game that are started when a game ball enters the specific ball unit.

  According to the feature H3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means starts upon entry of the game ball into the specific entry part by executing a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Since the first specific game and the second specific game to be set are set, the player pays attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. In addition, the game state transition means executes a re-lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game when the game ball enters the non-specific ball entering part, thereby playing the game in the specific ball entering part. Since the first specific game and the second specific game to be started upon entering the ball are reset, the player inserts the game ball into the non-specific ball entering section, whereby the first specific game and the first specific game are entered. The result of the lottery for selecting the specific game of 2 can be changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features H4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features H1 to H3 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A gaming machine characterized by.

  According to the feature H4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second specific control game means in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Since the specific game is started, the player expects to start the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features H5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature H4 of the present invention group,
An open / closed ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball is entered. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means,
After the opening / closing ball means is set to the open state, it is set as one game (round game) in the specific control state until the closed state is set again, and the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing ball means is set to a predetermined number. By starting the first specific game in which the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing ball means to be larger than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of games A game machine characterized by starting the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than balls.

  According to the feature H5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing entry means to a predetermined number of times, and opening / closing By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the ball entry means to a number larger than a predetermined number of times, a second specific game in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, so that the player performs the specific control. When starting the game in the state, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features H6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features H1 to H5 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the non-specific ball entering portion pays out the game ball based on the ball entering the game ball.

  According to the feature H6 of the present invention group, since the non-specific ball entering unit executes the payout of the game ball based on the ball entering the game ball, the player brings the game state into the specific control state by the game state transition means. After the transition, by inserting the game ball into the non-specific ball entering portion, it is possible to increase the game ball without starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features H7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features H1 to H6 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Equipped with opening and closing ball entering means (non-electric accessory 51)
The variable ball entering means,
The non-specific ball entering section that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means to enter, and does not shift the opening and closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball,
It is possible to enter a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means, and the specific ball entering portion that shifts the opening and closing ball entering means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of the game ball. And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature H7 of the present invention group, the specific ball entering portion moves the opening / closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball, so that the player can play the game with the game state transition means. After shifting the state to the next specific control state, the game ball in the specific control state can be started by inserting the game ball into the opening / closing entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Features H8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features H1 to H6 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Equipped with opening and closing ball entering means (non-electric accessory 51)
The variable ball entering means,
The specific ball entering portion that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means to enter, and does not shift the opening and closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball,
And a non-specific ball-entering section that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means to enter, and that moves the opening-and-closing ball-in means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering the game ball. Characteristic gaming machine.

  According to the feature H8 of the present invention group, the non-specific ball entry unit causes the opening / closing ball entry means to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entry of the game ball, so that the player thereafter opens / closes the ball entry means. By entering the game ball into, it is possible to start the game in the specific control state without entering the game ball into the specific ball-in portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can broaden the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature H9.
In the gaming machine described in the characteristic H7 or the characteristic H8 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that the game in the specific control state which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means is the second specific game.

  According to the feature H9 of the present invention group, since the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means is the second specific game, the opening / closing ball means is opened from the closed state. In the case of shifting to, the player inserts the game ball into the opening / closing ball means to start the second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature H10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features H7 to H9 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing entrance means,
A first receiving portion (each plate-shaped member 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening / closing ball means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball-in portion;
When the game ball is received by the first receiving portion, the open state is changed to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball by the second receiving portion, the closed state is changed to the open state. And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature H10 of the present invention group, the opening / closing ball means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. As a result, the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that it is possible to shift the open / closed state by using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature H11.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features H7 to H10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged in the first path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature H11 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs an internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the first path, the player shifts the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not transferred to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening / closing entrance means via the first path. In this case, the opening / closing entrance means will shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player shifts the game state to the specific control state before executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. You can play the game in the hope that you will.

Features H12.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features H7 to H10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entering means,
A first starting ball entering part (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering part (lower working port 37);
The gaming machine is
A first path (left-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to enter the game balls into the second starting ball entering section,
A second path (a right-handed route) in which it is easy to cause the game balls to enter the second starting ball entering section, and it is difficult to cause the game balls to enter the first starting ball entering section,
The opening and closing ball entering means arranged on a third path (weak hitting path) different from the first path and the second path,
The game state transition means,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball entering section,
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes a predetermined number of internal lottery, and then the second game state. To the first gaming state from the gaming machine.

  According to the feature H12 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, the player performs the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting entrance part via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the opening / closing entrance means is arranged in the third path, the player moves the opening / closing entrance means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not inserted into the opening / closing entry means. In this case, the opening / closing means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Features H13.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features H1 to H12 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
A klune (clue 53E) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means,
The specific entry ball portion and the non-specific entry ball portion are provided on the rolling surface and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

  According to the feature H13 of the present invention group, since the specific ball-in portion and the non-specific ball-in portion are provided on the rolling surface of the clune, the player determines the whereabouts of the game ball in the variable ball-in means. Will pay attention to. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

  According to the feature H group of the present invention as described above, it is possible to widen the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game. Therefore, the following problems can be solved. .

  Conventionally, an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is provided by providing a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball entering the actuation opening (starting entry means). A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, it shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the action of the player is interposed after shifting the game state to the specific control state, There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when entering the game ball. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a lottery ball means (upper working opening 36 and lower working opening 37) to be executed,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery entry ball means, the variable entry means (variable entry mechanism 52H) that allows entry of the game ball flowing down the game area. Equipped with
The variable ball entering means,
An open / close valve (open / close valve 526) that has an open state that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means to pass through and a closed state that does not allow it to pass, and an open / close valve (open / close valve 526) that switches between the open state and the closed state,
A first route (execution gate route) that guides the game ball that has passed through the on-off valve to the first channel (downstream guide passage 522b), and a second channel (downstream) that is different from the first channel A route switching valve (plate 523a) for switching between the first route and the second route, and a second route (Krune route) for guiding to the side guide passage 522c).
A first ball enterable state (execution) in which a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be allowed to enter so as to pass through the opening / closing valve when being switched to the first route by the route switching valve. A state in which a gate can be entered), and a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be enterable so as to pass through the opening / closing valve when being switched to the second route by the route switching valve. A gaming machine, comprising: a ball enterable state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the 2 ball enterable states (Clune ball enterable state).

  According to the feature I1 of the present invention group, the entry possible state switching means switches between the first entry possible state and the second entry available state, and the first entry possible state is the route switching valve. The game ball flowing down the game area is set to enter the ball so as to pass through the on-off valve when the route is switched to the first route, and the second state in which the ball can be entered is the second state by the route switching valve. The game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter so as to pass through the on-off valve when being switched to the route. Therefore, the player pays attention to the timing of switching the open / close valve to the open state, and the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature I2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I1 of the present invention group,
The entry possible state switching means, based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery entry ball means, the first entry possible state and the second entry possible A game machine characterized by switching states.

  According to the feature I2 of the present invention group, the entry possible state switching means, based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery entry means, the first entry possible state and Since the second entry possible state is switched, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature I3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I1 or the feature I2 of the present invention group,
The first route imparts a predetermined value to the player by guiding the game ball to the first flow path, and the second route guides the game ball to the second flow path. Thus, a gaming machine is provided with a higher value than the first flow path.

  According to the characteristic I3 of the present invention group, the second route gives the player a higher value than the first channel by guiding the game ball to the second channel, and thus the player is It is expected that the state is changed to the second enterable state by the enterable state switching means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

  According to the feature group I of the present invention as described above, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved.

  Conventionally, an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is provided by providing a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball entering the actuation opening (starting entry means). A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, it shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the action of the player is interposed after shifting the game state to the specific control state, There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature J group>
Features J1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when entering the game ball. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a lottery ball means (upper working opening 36 and lower working opening 37) to be executed,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery entry ball means, the variable entry means (variable entry mechanism 52H) that allows entry of the game ball flowing down the game area. Equipped with
The variable ball entering means,
A first flow (execution gate route) for guiding the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means to the first flow path (downstream guide passage 522b), and a second flow different from the first flow path. A route (downstream guide passage 522c) and a second route (Krune route), and a route switching valve (plate 523a) for switching between the first route and the second route,
The first route gives value to the player over a predetermined time by guiding the game balls to the first flow path, and the second route plays the game in the second flow path. A gaming machine characterized in that by guiding a ball, the player is given a value over a longer time than the first route.

  According to the feature J1 of the present invention group, the first route gives value to the player over a predetermined time by guiding the game ball to the first flow path, and the second route is the first route. When the player switches to the first route with the route switching valve, it guides the game ball to the second flow path to add value to the player over a longer time than the first route. In, it is possible to proceed to the next game with a good feeling, and when the second route is switched, it is possible to thoroughly enjoy the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features J2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature J1 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
A rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means,
A clune (clune 53) provided on the rolling surface and having a ball entry portion (each hole 533A to 533C) into which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface is entered,
A game machine characterized in that the second route guides a game ball to the rolling surface of the tune by guiding the game ball to the second flow path.

  According to the feature J2 of the present invention group, the second route guides the game ball to the second flow path to guide the game ball to the rolling surface of the clune, and thus the first flow path to the player. The value can be added over a longer period of time, and the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features J3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature J1 or the feature J2 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entering means,
An open / close valve (open / close valve 526) that has an open state that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means to pass through and a closed state that does not allow it to pass, and an open / close valve (open / close valve 526) that switches between the open state and the closed state,
The route switching valve for guiding the game ball that has passed through the on-off valve to the first flow path or the second flow path,
A first ball enterable state (execution) in which a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be allowed to enter so as to pass through the opening / closing valve when being switched to the first route by the route switching valve. A state in which a gate can be entered), and a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be enterable so as to pass through the opening / closing valve when being switched to the second route by the route switching valve. A gaming machine, comprising: a ball enterable state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the 2 ball enterable states (Clune ball enterable state).

  According to the feature J3 of the present invention group, the entry possible state switching means switches between the first entry possible state and the second entry possible state, and the first entry possible state is the route changeover valve. Set the game ball that flows down the game area so that it can enter the ball so that it will pass through the on-off valve when switching to the first route, and open and close when switching to the second route with the route switching valve A game ball flowing down the game area so as to pass through the valve is set to be able to enter. Therefore, the player pays attention to the timing of switching the open / close valve to the open state, and the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

  According to the feature J group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and therefore the following problems can be solved.

  Conventionally, an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is provided by providing a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball entering the actuation opening (starting entry means). A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, it shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

  However, since the gaming machine starts the game in the specific control state by following the same flow regardless of whether or not the action of the player is interposed after shifting the game state to the specific control state, There is a problem that a series of flows from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

  As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

  10 ... Pachinko machine, 35 ... General winning opening, 36 ... Upper working opening, 37 ... Lower working opening, 38 ... Variable winning device, 38a ... Large winning opening, 38b ... Opening / closing door, 38c ... Variable winning driving section, 39 ... Out Mouth, 47 ... Symbol display device, 60 ... Main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... Audio emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... Display control device, 102 ... MPU.

Claims (4)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area are allowed to enter, and an internal lottery for executing an internal lottery when entering the game ball And a game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means. Machine,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and the open state is closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing entrance means to move to,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entering of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, a variable ball entering means for allowing the game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
The variable ball entering means,
A first ball entrance means to allow ball entrance for ball entrance to gaming balls, not shifted the closing ball entrance means based on input ball game ball from a closed state to an open state in the variable ball entrance means,
It said variable ball entrance means ball entrance and gaming balls were possible ball entrance, and a second ball entrance means for shifting and the opening and closing ball entrance means based on input ball game ball from a closed state to an open state,
The game state transition means,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, the specific control state upon entering the game ball into any of the opening / closing entrance means, the first entrance means , and the second entrance means Equipped with a specific control start means for starting the game of
The game of the specific control state,
The first specific game,
A second specific game for giving a higher value to the player than the first specific game,
The specific control start means, when entering a game ball into one of the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, either the first specific game or the second specific game A game machine characterized by starting. In the gaming machine described in claim 1,
A game machine characterized in that the game in the specific control state which is started when the game ball enters the opening / closing ball means is the second specific game. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The game state transition means executes a lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby the game balls to the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means . A game machine characterized by setting the first specific game and the second specific game to be started upon entering a ball. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A gaming machine characterized by.

Images